2013-2018 Kia Ceed SUV Features of your vehicle User Manual
MyCarUserManual.com
USER MANUALS FOR EVERY MAKE & MODEL

Features of your vehicle for Your Kia Ceed SUV Second Generation (2013-2018)

JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 1  
Features of your vehicle  
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Remote keyless entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
• Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
• Smart key precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
• Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation. . . . . . 4-13  
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
• Theft-alarm stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
• From outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
• From inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
• Deadlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20  
• Door lock/unlock features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20  
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
• Opening the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
• Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
• Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27  
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
• Opening the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
• Closing the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
• Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
• Sliding the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
• Resetting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
• Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
• Flex steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
Instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46  
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
• Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
• Manual transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
• Automatic transaxle shift position indicator. . . . . . 4-49  
• Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . . 4-50  
• Speed limiter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51  
4
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 2  
• Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51  
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51  
• LCD display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73  
• Warnings and indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79  
Instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59  
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61  
• Cluster display mode conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61  
• Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61  
• Manual transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64  
• Automatic transaxle shift position indicator. . . . . . 4-65  
• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101  
• How the system works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104  
• Additional instructions(messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109  
• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109  
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110  
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110  
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111  
• Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111  
• Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111  
• Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-111  
• Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112  
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112  
• High - beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114  
• Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115  
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116  
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116  
• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116  
• Headlight leveling device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117  
• Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFLS) . . . . . . . . 4-118  
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119  
• Windshield wipers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119  
• Windshield washers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121  
• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-122  
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123  
• Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123  
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123  
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124  
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124  
• Luggage room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125  
• Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . . 4-65  
4
• Speed limiter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66  
• Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66  
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67  
• LCD display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73  
• Warnings and indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79  
LCD display warnings and indicators  
(instrument panel display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90  
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92  
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92  
• Non-operational conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94  
• Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94  
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95  
Parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96  
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96  
• Non-operational conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98  
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99  
Smart Parking Assist System(SPAS) . . . . . . . . . . 4-100  
• Operating condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 3  
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125  
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154  
• Luggage tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154  
• Luggage side tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155  
Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155  
• Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155  
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156  
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157  
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158  
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158  
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159  
• Aux, USB and iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160  
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161  
• Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161  
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162  
• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162  
• Barrier net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163  
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166  
• Luggage rail system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167  
• Shopping bag holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168  
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169  
• Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169  
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172  
• Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172  
• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173  
• How car audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174  
Welcome system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126  
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126  
• Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126  
• Puddle lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126  
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127  
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127  
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128  
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129  
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133  
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135  
• Checking the amount of air conditioner  
refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-136  
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137  
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-138  
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140  
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145  
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147  
• Checking the amount of air conditioner  
refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-148  
Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . 4-149  
• Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149  
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150  
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151  
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152  
• Center console storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152  
• Sliding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152  
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153  
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153  
4
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 4  
Features of your vehicle  
KEYS  
Record your key number  
Immobilizer system  
WARNING  
The key code number is  
stamped on the key  
code tag attached to the  
key set. Should you lose  
your keys, we recom-  
Your vehicle may be equipped with an  
electronic engine immobilizer system to  
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle  
use.  
We recommend that you use parts  
for replacement from an authorized  
Kia dealer. If an aftermarket key is  
used, the ignition switch may not  
return to ON after START. If this  
happens, the starter will continue  
to operate causing damage to the  
starter motor and possible fire due  
to excessive current in the wiring.  
Your immobilizer system is comprised of  
a small transponder in the key and elec-  
tronic devices inside the vehicle.  
mend that you contact an authorized Kia  
dealer. Remove the key code tag and  
store it in a safe place. Also, record the  
code number and keep it in a safe and  
handy place, but not in the vehicle.  
Vehicles without smart key system  
With the immobilizer system, whenever  
you insert your ignition key into the igni-  
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks  
and determines and verifies if the ignition  
key is valid or not.  
Key operations  
WARNING - Ignition key  
(Smart key)  
• Used to start the engine.  
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.  
Leaving children unattended in a  
vehicle with the ignition key (Smart  
key) is dangerous even if the key is  
not in the ignition or start button is  
ACC or ON position. Children copy  
adults and they could place the key  
in the ignition or press the start but-  
ton. The ignition key (Smart key)  
would enable children to operate  
power windows or other controls, or  
even make the vehicle move, which  
could result in serious bodily injury  
or even death. Never leave the keys  
in your vehicle with unsupervised  
children, when the engine is running.  
If the key is valid, the engine will start.  
If the key is invalid, the engine will not  
start.  
To deactivate the immobilizer system:  
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-  
der and turn it to the ON position.  
To activate the immobilizer system:  
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.  
The immobilizer system activates auto-  
matically. Without a valid ignition key for  
your vehicle, the engine will not start.  
4 4  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 5  
Features of your vehicle  
Vehicles with smart key system  
✽
NOTICE  
WARNING  
Whenever the engine start/stop button is  
changed to the ON position, the immobi-  
lizer system checks and verifies if the key  
is valid or not.  
If you need additional keys or lose your  
keys, we recommend that you consult an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-  
cle, do not leave spare keys any-  
where in your vehicle. Your immobi-  
lizer password is a customer unique  
password and should be kept confi-  
dential. Do not leave this number  
anywhere in your vehicle.  
If the key is valid, the engine will start.  
If the key is invalid, the engine will not  
start.  
CAUTION  
The transponder in your ignition  
key is an important part of the  
immobilizer system. It is designed  
to give years of trouble-free service,  
however you should avoid expo-  
sure to moisture, static electricity  
and rough handling. Immobilizer  
system malfunction could occur.  
To deactivate the immobilizer system  
Change the engine start/stop button to  
the ON position.  
✽
NOTICE  
When starting the engine, do not use the  
key with other immobilizer keys around.  
Otherwise the engine may not start or  
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each  
key separate in order to avoid a starting  
malfuntioin.  
To activate the immobilizer system  
Change the engine start/stop button to  
the OFF position. The immobilizer sys-  
tem activates automatically. Without a  
valid smart key for your vehicle, the  
engine will not start.  
CAUTION  
Do not change, alter or adjust the  
immobilizer system because it  
could cause the immobilizer sys-  
tem to malfunction. We recommend  
that the system be serviced by an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
CAUTION  
Do not put metal accessories near  
the ignition switch.  
The engine may not start because  
the metal accessories may interrupt  
the transponder signal from nor-  
mally transmitting.  
Malfunctions caused by improper  
alterations, adjustments or modifi-  
cations to the immobilizer system  
are not covered by your vehicle  
manufacturer warranty.  
4 5  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 6  
Features of your vehicle  
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)  
■ Type A  
■ Type A  
Remote keyless entry system  
operations  
Type A, B  
• To unfold the key, press the release  
button then the key will unfold automat-  
ically.  
• To fold the key, fold the key manually  
while pressing the release button.  
OAM049096L  
OJD043244  
OJD042002  
OXM049003  
OJD043245  
OJD042001  
CAUTION  
■ Type B  
■ Type B  
Do not fold the key without press-  
ing the release button. This may  
damage the key.  
Type C  
• To remove the mechanical key, press  
and hold the release button and  
remove the mechanical key.  
■ Type C  
■ Type C  
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put the  
key into the hole and push it until a  
click sound is heard.  
4 6  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 7  
Features of your vehicle  
Lock (1)  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Press the lock button.  
Unlock (2)  
1. Press the unlock button.  
Tailgate unlock (3)  
1. Press the tailgate unlock button for  
more than 1 second.  
2. The hazard warning lights will blink  
twice to indicate that all doors are  
unlocked. Also, the outside rearview  
mirror will automatically unfold if the  
outside rearview mirror folding switch  
(Type C) is in the AUTO position (if  
equipped).  
2. The hazard warning light will blink  
twice to indicate the tailgate is  
unlocked.  
3. The hazard warning light will blink  
once to indicate that all doors are  
locked (the engine hood and tailgate  
must be closed). Also, the outside  
rearview mirror will automatically fold if  
the outside rearview mirror folding  
switch (Type C) is in the AUTO position  
(if equipped).  
✽
NOTICE  
• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-  
gate will lock automatically unless it is  
opened within 30 seconds.  
✽
NOTICE  
After unlocking all doors, the doors will • Once the tailgate is opened and then  
✽
NOTICE  
The doors will not lock if any door is  
opened.  
lock and the outside rearview mirror  
will unfold if the outside rearview mir-  
ror folding switch (Type C) is in the • The word "HOLD" is written on the  
AUTO position (if equipped) unless a  
door is opened within 30 seconds.  
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-  
cally.  
button to inform you that you must  
press and hold the button.  
4 7  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 8  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
Transmitter precautions  
CAUTION  
• If the transmitter is in close proximity  
to your cell phone or smart phone, the  
signal from the transmitter could be  
blocked by normal operation of your  
cell phone or smart phone. This is  
especially important when the phone  
is active such as making call, receiving  
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/  
receiving emails. Avoid placing the  
transmitter and your cell phone or  
smart phone in the same pants or  
jacket pocket and maintain adequate  
distance between the two devices.  
✽
NOTICE  
The transmitter will not work if any of  
following occur:  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could  
void the user’s authority to operate  
the equipment. If the keyless entry  
system is inoperative due to  
changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance, it will  
not be covered by your manufactur-  
er’s vehicle warranty.  
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.  
• You exceed the operating distance  
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).  
• The battery in the transmitter is  
weak.  
• Other vehicles or objects may be  
blocking the signal.  
• The weather is extremely cold.  
• The transmitter is close to a radio  
transmitter such as a radio station or  
an airport which can interfere with  
normal operation of the transmitter.  
When the transmitter does not work cor-  
rectly, open and close the door with the  
ignition key. If you have a problem with  
the transmitter, we recommend that you  
contact an authorized Kia dealer.  
(Continued)  
CAUTION  
• Keep the transmitter away from  
water or any liquid. If the keyless  
entry system is inoperative due to  
exposure to water or liquids, it  
will not be covered by your manu-  
facturer vehicle warranty.  
• Keep the transmitter away from  
electromagnetic materials that  
blocks electromagnetic waves to  
the key surface.  
4 8  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 9  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
■ Type C  
Battery replacement  
A battery should last for several years,  
but if the transmitter or smart key is not  
working properly, try replacing the bat-  
tery with a new one. If you are unsure  
how to use or replace the battery, we rec-  
ommend that you contact an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
OFD047003  
■ Type B  
OJD042003  
Type C  
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-  
tly pry open the cover.  
OYDDCO2005  
Type A, B  
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-  
tly pry open the cover.  
2. Replace the battery with a new battery  
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,  
make sure the battery position.  
3. Install the rear cover.  
4 9  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 10  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
• The transmitter or smart key is  
designed to give you years of  
trouble-free use, however it can  
malfunction if exposed to mois-  
ture or static electricity. If you are  
unsure how to use or replace the  
battery, we recommend that you  
contact an authorized Kia dealer.  
• Using the wrong battery can  
cause the transmitter or smart  
key to malfunction. Be sure to use  
the correct battery.  
OJD042004  
OJD042006  
4. Push the battery out from the battery  
holder.  
• To avoid damaging the transmit-  
ter or smart key, don't drop it, get  
it wet, or expose it to heat or sun-  
light.  
5. Replace the battery with a new battery  
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,  
make sure the battery position.  
6. Install the battery in the reverse order  
of removal.  
CAUTION  
For transmitter or smart key replace-  
ment, we recommend that you contact  
an authorized Kia dealer.  
An inappropriately disposed bat-  
tery can be harmful to the environ-  
ment and human health.  
OJD042005  
2. Pull the smart key module out.  
3. Turn the smart key module over.  
Dispose the battery according to  
your local law(s) or regulation.  
4 10  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 11  
Features of your vehicle  
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)  
Locking  
1. Carry the smart key.  
2. Close all doors.  
3. Press the button of the outside door  
handle.  
4. The hazard warning lights will blink  
once (the engine hood and tailgate  
must be closed). Also, the outside  
rearview mirror will automatically fold  
if the outside rearview mirror folding  
switch is in the AUTO position (if  
equipped).  
OJD042001  
OJD042008  
5. Make sure that doors are locked by  
pulling the outside door handle.  
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and  
unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate.  
Smart key function  
1.Door lock  
2.Door unlock  
3.Tailgate unlock  
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to  
the following, for more details.  
✽
NOTICE  
• The button will only operate when the  
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from  
the outside door handle.  
• Even though you press the outside  
door handle button, the doors will not  
lock and the chime will sound for 3  
seconds if any of following occur:  
- The smart key is in the vehicle.  
- The engine start/stop button is in  
ACC or ON position.  
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock  
a door and tailgate and even start the  
engine without inserting the key.  
The functions of the buttons on a smart  
key are similar to the remote keyless  
entry. Refer to the “Remote keyless  
entry” in this chapter.  
- Any door except the tailgate is  
opened.  
4 11  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 12  
Features of your vehicle  
■ 3 Door and 5 Door  
Unlocking  
1. Carry the smart key.  
✽
NOTICE  
• Once the tailgate is opened and then  
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-  
cally.  
2.Press the button of the front outside  
door handle.  
3.All doors will unlock and the hazard  
warning lights will blink twice. Also, the  
outside rearview mirror will automati-  
cally unfold if the outside rearview mir-  
ror folding switch is in the AUTO posi-  
tion (if equipped).  
• The button will only operate when the  
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from  
the tailgate handle.  
OJD042016  
■ Wagon  
✽
NOTICE  
• The button will only operate when the  
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from  
the outside door handle.  
• When the smart key is recognized in  
the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the  
front outside door handle, other peo-  
ple can also open the doors.  
• After unlocking all doors, the doors  
will lock and the outside rearview  
mirror will unfold if the outside  
rearview mirror folding switch (Type  
B) is in the AUTO position (if  
equipped) unless a door is opened  
within 30 seconds.  
OJD042241  
Tailgate unlocking  
1.Carry the smart key.  
2.Press the tailgate handle switch.  
3.The tailgate will unlock.  
4 12  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:21 PM Page 13  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
Smart key precautions  
• If the smart key is in close proximity  
to your cell phone or smart phone, the  
signal from the smart key could be  
blocked by normal operation of your  
cell phone or smart phone. This is  
especially important when the phone  
is active such as making call, receiving  
✽
NOTICE  
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose  
your smart key, you will not be able to  
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if  
necessary, we recommend that you  
contact an authorized Kia dealer.  
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be  
registered to a single vehicle. If you  
lose a smart key, we recommend that  
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.  
• The smart key will not work if any of  
the following occurs:  
calls,  
text  
messaging,  
and/or  
sending/receiving emails. Avoid plac-  
ing the smart key and your cell phone  
or smart phone in the same pants or  
jacket pocket and maintain adequate  
distance between the two devices.  
OJD042002  
Door lock/unlock in an emer-  
gency situation  
- The smart key is close to a radio  
transmitter such as a radio station or  
an airport which can interfere with  
normal operation of the smart key.  
- The smart key is near a mobile two-  
way radio system or a cellular  
phone.  
CAUTION  
If the smart key does not operate normal-  
ly, you can lock or unlock the doors by  
using the mechanical key.  
Keep the smart key away from  
water or any liquid. If the keyless  
entry system is inoperative due to  
exposure to water or liquids, it will  
not be covered by your manufactur-  
er’s vehicle warranty.  
1.Press and hold the release button (1)  
and remove the mechanical key (2).  
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being  
operated close to your vehicle.  
2.Insert the key into the hole of the out-  
side door handle. Turn the key toward  
the rear of the vehicle to unlock and  
toward the front of the vehicle to lock.  
When the smart key does not work  
properly, open and close the door with  
the mechanical key. If you have a  
problem with the smart key, we rec-  
ommend that you contact an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the  
key into the hole and push it until a  
click sound is heard.  
(Continued)  
4 13  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 14  
Features of your vehicle  
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
Armed stage  
Using the smart key  
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.  
Arm the system as described below.  
1. Turn off the engine.  
Armed  
stage  
2. Make sure that all doors, the engine  
hood and tailgate are closed and  
latched.  
Theft-alarm  
stage  
Disarmed  
stage  
3.• Lock the doors by pressing the button  
of the front outside door handle with  
the smart key in your possession.  
After completion of the steps above,  
the hazard warning lights will operate  
once to indicate that the system is  
armed.  
OJC040170  
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm sys-  
tem will have a label attached to the vehi-  
cle with the following words:  
1. WARNING  
This system is designed to provide pro-  
tection from unauthorized entry into the  
vehicle. This system is operated in three  
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the  
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and  
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-  
gered, the system provides an audible  
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning  
lights.  
If the tailgate or engine hood remains  
opened, the hazard warning lights will  
not operate and theft-alarm will not  
arm. After this, if the tailgate and  
engine hood are closed, the hazard  
warning lights will blink once and the  
theft-alarm will arm.  
2. SECURITY SYSTEM  
4 14  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 15  
Features of your vehicle  
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock  
button on the smart key.  
Using the transmitter  
Theft-alarm stage  
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.  
Arm the system as described below.  
1.Turn off the engine and remove the  
ignition key from the ignition switch.  
The alarm will be activated if any of the  
following occurs while the system is  
armed.  
After completion of the steps above,  
the hazard warning lights will operate  
once to indicate that the system is  
armed.  
• A front or rear door is opened without  
using transmitter or smart key.  
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine  
hood and tailgate are closed and  
latched.  
If the tailgate or engine hood remains  
opened, the hazard warning lights will  
not operate and theft-alarm will not  
arm. After this, if the tailgate and  
engine hood are closed, the hazard  
warning lights will blink once and the  
theft-alarm will arm.  
• The tailgate is opened without using  
transmitter or smart key.  
• The engine hood is opened.  
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock  
button on the transmitter.  
The siren will sound and the hazard  
warning lights will blink continuously for  
27 seconds, unless the system is dis-  
armed. To turn off the system, unlock the  
doors with the transmitter or smart key.  
After completion of the steps above,  
the hazard warning lights will blink  
once to indicate that the system is  
armed.  
If the tailgate or engine hood remains  
opened, the hazard warning lights will  
not operate and theft-alarm will not  
arm. After this, if the tailgate and  
engine hood are closed, the hazard  
warning lights will blink once and the  
theft-alarm will arm.  
• Do not arm the system until all pas-  
sengers have left the vehicle. If the  
system is armed while a passen-  
ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the  
alarm may be activated when the  
remaining passenger(s) leave the  
vehicle. If any door, tailgate or  
engine hood is opened within 30  
seconds after entering the armed  
stage, the system is disarmed to  
prevent unnecessary alarm.  
4 15  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 16  
Features of your vehicle  
Disarmed stage  
✽
NOTICE  
CAUTION  
• Without smart key system  
The system will be disarmed when:  
Transmitter  
Do not change, alter or adjust the  
theft-alarm system because it could  
cause the theft-alarm system to  
malfunction and we recommend  
that the system be serviced by an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
If the system is not disarmed with the  
transmitter, insert the key into the  
ignition switch and start the engine.  
Then the system will be disarmed.  
- The door unlock button is pressed.  
- The engine is started.  
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion for 30 seconds or more.  
• With smart key system  
If the system is not disarmed with the  
smart key, open the door with the  
mechanical key and start the engine.  
Then the system will be disarmed.  
• If you lose your keys, we recommend  
that you consult an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
Malfunctions caused by improper  
alterations, adjustments or modifi-  
cations to the theft-alarm system  
are not covered by your vehicle  
manufacturer warranty.  
Smart key  
- The door unlock button is pressed.  
- The button of the front outside door is  
pressed while carrying the smart key.  
- The engine is started.  
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard  
warning lights will blink twice to indicate  
that the system is disarmed.  
After pressing the unlock button, if any  
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30  
seconds, the system will be rearmed.  
4 16  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 17  
Features of your vehicle  
DOOR LOCKS  
Operating door locks from out-  
side the vehicle  
■ Type A  
Transmitter/Smart key  
• Doors can be locked and unlocked with  
the transmitter or smart key.  
• Doors can be locked and unlocked by  
pressing the button of the outside door  
handle with the smart key in your pos-  
session. (vehicles equipped with smart  
key system)  
OJD043503  
■ Type B  
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may  
be opened by pulling the door handle.  
OJD043010  
• When closing the door, push the door  
by hand. Make sure that doors are  
closed securely.  
Mechanical key  
• If the transmitter or smart key does not  
operate normally, you can lock or unlock  
the doors by the mechanical key.  
Insert the key into the key hole of the  
outside door handle.Turn the key toward  
the rear of the vehicle to unlock and  
toward the front of the vehicle to lock.  
ORP042235  
■ Type C  
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with  
a key while the power door lock switch  
does not operate normally, only the dri-  
ver’s door will lock/unlock.  
• Once the door is unlocked, it may be  
opened by pulling the door handle.  
• When closing the door, push the door  
by hand. Make sure that doors are  
closed securely.  
OJD042001  
4 17  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 18  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
• In cold and wet climates, door lock  
and door mechanisms may not work  
properly due to freezing conditions.  
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-  
ple times in rapid succession with  
either the vehicle key or door lock  
switch, the system may stop operating  
temporarily in order to protect the  
circuit and prevent damage to system  
components.  
Unlock  
Lock  
OJD042012  
OJD042013  
WARNING  
• If you don't close the door secure-  
ly, the door may open again.  
In case of an emergency  
(5 Door and wagon)  
Operating door locks from inside  
the vehicle  
If the power door lock switch does not  
operate electrically, the only way to lock  
the door(s) is with the mechanical key  
from the outside key hole.  
With the door handle  
Driver’s door and front passanger’s door  
(if equipped)  
If the inner door handle is pulled when  
the door is locked, the door will unlock  
and open.  
• Be careful that someone's body  
and hands are not trapped when  
closing the door.  
You can lock the doors without the out-  
side key hole as follows:  
1. Open the door.  
2. Insert the key into the emergency door  
lock hole and turn the key horizontally  
to lock.  
Rear door (if equipped)  
If the inner door handle is pulled once  
when the door is locked, the door will  
unlock.  
3. Close the door securely.  
If the inner door handle is pulled once  
more, the door will open.  
4 18  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 19  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
WARNING - Doors  
Once the doors are locked with the  
transmitter or smart key, the doors can-  
not be unlocked with the central door  
lock/unlock switch.  
• The doors should always be fully  
closed and locked while the vehi-  
cle is in motion to prevent acci-  
dental opening of the door.  
Locked doors will also discour-  
age potential intruders when the  
vehicle stops or slows down.  
WARNING - Door lock mal-  
function  
If a power door lock ever fails to  
function while you are in the vehi-  
cle, try one or more of the follow-  
ing:  
• Be careful when opening doors  
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-  
cles, bicycles or pedestrians  
approaching the vehicle in the  
path of the door. Opening a door  
when something is approaching  
can cause damage or injury.  
OJD042014  
• Operate the other door locks and  
handles.  
With central door lock/unlock switch  
It is operated by pressing the door lock/  
unlock switch.  
• Lower the driver’s window and  
use the key to unlock the door  
from outside.  
• When you press the central door lock  
switch, all vehicle doors will lock and  
the indicator light on the switch will illu-  
minate.  
• Move to the cargo area and open  
the tailgate.  
• If any door is opened when the switch  
is pressed, all doors will not lock.  
• If any door is unlocked, the indicator of  
the central door lock switch will go off.  
• When you press the central door  
unlock switch, all vehicle doors will  
unlock.  
4 19  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 20  
Features of your vehicle  
Deadlocks (if equipped)  
Door lock/unlock features  
WARNING - Unlocked  
vehicles  
Some vehicles are equipped with a  
deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent  
opening of a door from either inside or  
outside the vehicle once the deadlocks  
have been activated providing an addi-  
tional measure of vehicle security.  
Impact sensing door unlock system  
All doors will automatically unlock when  
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.  
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can  
invite theft or possible harm to you  
or others from someone hiding in  
your vehicle while you are gone.  
Always remove the ignition key,  
engage the parking brake, close all  
windows and lock all doors when  
leaving your vehicle unattended.  
Speed sensing door lock system  
(if equipped)  
All doors will automatically lock after the  
vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.  
To lock the vehicle using the deadlock  
function, the doors must be locked by  
using the transmitter or smart key. To  
unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or  
smart key must be used again.  
Engine off door unlock system  
(if equipped)  
All doors will automatically unlock:  
WARNING - Unattended  
children  
Without smart key system  
When the key is removed from the igni-  
tion switch.  
WARNING  
Do not lock the doors with the  
transmitter or the smart key with  
anybody left in the vehicle.The pas-  
senger in the vehicle cannot unlock  
the doors with the door lock button.  
For example, if the door is locked  
with the transmitter, the passenger  
in the vehicle cannot unlock the  
door without the transmitter.  
An enclosed vehicle can become  
extremely hot, causing death or  
severe injury to unattended chil-  
dren or animals who cannot escape  
the vehicle. Furthermore, children  
might operate features of the vehi-  
cle that could injure them, or they  
could encounter other harm, possi-  
bly from someone gaining entry to  
the vehicle. Never leave children or  
animals unattended in your vehicle.  
With smart key system  
When the engine start/stop button is in  
the OFF position.  
Shift lever door lock/unlock system  
• All doors will automatically lock when  
the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).  
• All doors will automatically unlock when  
the shift lever is moved into P (Park).  
You can activate or deactivate the auto  
door lock/unlock features in the vehicle.  
Refer to "User setting" in this chapter.  
4 20  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 21  
Features of your vehicle  
3. Close the rear door.  
To open the rear door, pull the outside  
door handle (2).  
Even though the doors may be unlocked,  
the rear door will not open by pulling the  
inner door handle (3) until rear door child  
safety lock is unlocked.  
WARNING - Rear door  
locks  
If children accidentally open the  
rear doors while the vehicle is in  
motion, they could fall out and be  
severely injured or killed. To pre-  
vent children from opening the rear  
doors from the inside, the rear door  
safety locks should be used when-  
ever children are in the vehicle.  
OJD042015  
Child-protector rear door lock  
(5 Door and wagon)  
The child safety lock is provided to help  
prevent children from accidentally open-  
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.  
The rear door safety locks should be used  
whenever children are in the vehicle.  
1. Open the rear door.  
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the  
hole (1) and turn it to the “lock(  
)”  
position. When the child safety lock is  
in the lock position, the rear door will  
not open even though the inner door  
handle (3) is pulled inside the vehicle.  
4 21  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 22  
Features of your vehicle  
TAILGATE  
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-  
gate unlock button on the transmitter or  
smart key is pressed for approximately  
1 second or the tailgate handle switch  
is pressed with the smart key in your  
possession.  
■ 3 Door and 5 Door  
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened  
by pressing the handle and pulling it up.  
• Once the tailgate is opened and then  
closed, the tailgate locks automatically.  
(All doors must be locked.)  
OJD042016  
■ Wagon  
OJD042087  
✽
NOTICE  
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may  
differ from the illustration.  
In cold and wet climates, door lock and  
door mechanisms may not work proper-  
ly due to freezing conditions.  
Closing the tailgate  
Lower and push down the tailgate firmly.  
Make sure that the tailgate is securely  
latched.  
WARNING  
The tailgate swings upward. Make  
sure no objects or people are near  
the rear of the vehicle when open-  
ing the tailgate.  
OJD042241  
WARNING  
Opening the tailgate  
Make sure your hands, feet and other  
parts of your body are safely out of  
the way before closing the tailgate.  
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked  
when all doors are locked or unlocked  
with the key, transmitter, smart key or  
central door lock/unlock switch.  
CAUTION  
Make certain that you close the tail-  
gate before driving your vehicle.  
Possible damage may occur to the  
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching  
hardware if the tailgate is not  
closed prior to driving.  
4 22  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 23  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Make sure nothing is near the tail-  
gate latch and striker while closing  
the tailgate. It may damage the tail-  
gate's latch.  
• For emergencies, be fully aware  
of the location of the emergency  
tailgate safety release lever in the  
vehicle and how to open the tail-  
gate if you are accidentally locked  
in the luggage compartment.  
• No one should be allowed to  
occupy the luggage compartment  
of the vehicle at any time. The  
luggage compartment is a very  
dangerous location in the event  
of a crash.  
WARNING - Exhaust  
fumes  
If you drive with the tailgate  
opened, you will draw dangerous  
exhaust fumes into your vehicle  
which can cause serious injury or  
death to vehicle occupants.  
OJD042017  
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may  
differ from the illustration.  
• Use the release lever for emer-  
gencies only. Use with extreme  
caution, especially while the vehi-  
cle is in motion.  
If you must drive with the tailgate  
opened, keep the air vents and all  
windows open so that additional  
outside air comes into the vehicle.  
Emergency tailgate safety release  
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-  
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-  
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When  
someone is inadvertently locked in the  
luggage compartment. The tailgate can  
be opened by doing as follows:  
WARNING - Rear cargo  
area  
1. Input the machanical key into the hole.  
2. Push the machanical key to the right.  
3. Push up the tailgate.  
Occupants should never ride in the  
rear cargo area where no restraints  
are available. To avoid injury in the  
event of an accident or sudden  
stops, occupants should always be  
properly restrained.  
4 23  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 24  
Features of your vehicle  
WINDOWS  
(1) Driver’s door power window switch  
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-  
dow switch  
(3) Rear door (left) power window  
switch* (for 5 Door and wagon)  
(4) Rear door (right) power window  
switch* (for 5 Door and wagon)  
(5) Window opening and closing  
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*  
(7) Power window lock switch*  
*: if equipped  
✽
NOTICE  
In cold and wet climates, power win-  
dows may not work properly due to  
freezing conditions.  
OJD042018  
4 24  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 25  
Features of your vehicle  
Power windows  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position for power windows to operate.  
Each door has a power window switch  
that controls the door’s window. The dri-  
ver’s door has a master power window  
switch that controls all the windows in the  
vehicle. Also, the driver has a power win-  
dow lock switch which can block the  
operation of rear passenger windows.  
The power windows can be operated for  
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-  
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC  
or LOCK position. However, if the front  
doors are opened, the power windows  
cannot be operated even within the 30  
seconds period.  
OJD042019  
OJD042020  
Type B - Auto up/down window  
(if equipped)  
Window opening and closing  
Type A  
Pressing or pulling up the power window  
switch momentarily to the second detent  
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the  
window even when the switch is released.  
To stop the window at the desired position  
while the window is in operation, pull up  
or press down and release the switch.  
To open or close a window, press down  
or pull up the front portion of the corre-  
sponding switch to the first detent posi-  
tion (5).  
✽
NOTICE  
While driving with the rear windows  
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)  
in an open (or partially open position),  
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind  
buffeting or pulsation noise. This  
noise is a normal occurrence and can be  
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-  
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with  
one or both of the rear windows down,  
partially lower both front windows  
approximately one inch. If you experi-  
ence the noise with the sunroof open,  
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof  
opening.  
✽
NOTICE  
If the power window does not operate  
normally, the automatic power window  
system must be reset as follows:  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON  
position.  
2. Close the window and continue  
pulling up the power window switch  
for at least 1 second after the window  
is completely closed.  
4 25  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 26  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
The automatic reverse feature is only  
active when the “auto up” feature is  
used by fully pulling up the switch. The  
automatic reverse feature will not oper-  
ate if the window is raised using the  
halfway position on the power window  
switch.  
WARNING  
Always check for obstructions  
before raising any window to avoid  
injuries or vehicle damage. If an  
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in  
diameter is caught between the  
window glass and the upper win-  
dow channel, the automatic reverse  
window may not detect the resist-  
ance and will not stop and reverse  
direction.  
OUN026013  
OJD042021  
Automatic reversal (for type B window)  
Power window lock button  
(for 5 Door and wagon) (if equipped)  
If the upward movement of the window is  
blocked by an object or part of the body,  
the window will detect the resistance and  
will stop upward movement. The window  
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8  
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.  
The driver can disable the power window  
switches on the rear passengers' doors  
by pressing the power window lock  
switch to the lock position (pressed).  
When the power window lock switch is  
pressed:  
If the window detects the resistance  
while the power window switch is pulled  
up continuously, the window will stop  
upward movement then lower approxi-  
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power  
window switch is pulled up continuously  
again within 5 seconds after the window  
is lowered by the automatic window  
reversal feature, the automatic window  
reversal will not operate.  
• The driver's master control can oper-  
ate all the power windows.  
• The front passenger's control can  
operate the front passenger's power  
window.  
• The rear passenger's control cannot  
operate the rear passenger's power  
window.  
4 26  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:22 PM Page 27  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
WARNING - Windows  
• To prevent possible damage to the  
power window system, do not open  
or close two windows or more at  
the same time.This will also ensure  
the longevity of the fuse.  
• NEVER leave the keys in your  
vehicle with unsupervised chil-  
dren when the engine is running.  
• NEVER leave any child unattend-  
ed in the vehicle. Even very  
young children may inadvertently  
cause the vehicle to move, entan-  
gle themselves in the windows,  
or otherwise injure themselves or  
others.  
• Never try to operate the main  
switch on the driver's door and  
the individual door window  
switch in opposing directions at  
the same time. If this is done, the  
window will stop and cannot be  
opened or closed.  
OED036088  
• Always double check to make sure  
all arms, hands, head and other  
obstructions are safely out of the  
way before closing a window.  
Manual windows  
(for 5 Door and wagon)  
(if equipped)  
• Do not allow children to play with  
the power windows. Keep the dri-  
ver’s door power window lock  
switch in the LOCK position  
(pressed). Serious injury can  
result from unintentional window  
operation by the child.  
To raise or lower the window, turn the  
window regulator handle clockwise or  
counterclockwise.  
WARNING  
When opening or closing the win-  
dows, make sure your passenger's  
arms, hands and body are safely  
out of the way.  
• Do not extend face or arms out-  
side the window while driving.  
4 27  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 28  
Features of your vehicle  
HOOD  
OJD042022  
OJD042023  
OJD042024  
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the  
hood slightly, push the secondary latch  
inside of the hood center and lift the  
hood.  
3.Pull out the support rod.  
4.Hold the hood opened with the support  
rod.  
Opening the hood  
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the  
hood. The hood should pop open  
slightly.  
WARNING - Hot parts  
WARNING  
Be very careful not to touch the  
support rod when the engine and  
parts are hot.You could get burned  
or get seriously injured.  
Open the hood after turning off the  
engine on a flat surface, shifting  
the shift lever to the P(Park) posi-  
tion for automatic transaxle and to  
the 1(First) gear or R(Reverse) for  
manual transaxle, and setting the  
parking brake.  
4 28  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 29  
Features of your vehicle  
Closing the hood  
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-  
lowing:  
WARNING - Hood  
WARNING  
• Before closing the hood, ensure  
that all obstructions are removed  
from the hood opening. Closing  
the hood with an obstruction  
present in the hood opening may  
result in property damage or  
severe personal injury.  
• Always double check to be sure  
that the hood is firmly latched  
before driving away. If it is not  
latched, the hood could fly open  
while the vehicle is being driven,  
causing a total loss of visibility,  
which might result in an accident.  
• All filler caps in engine compartment  
must be correctly installed.  
• Gloves, rags or any other com-  
bustible material must be removed  
from the engine compartment.  
2. Return the support rod to its clip to  
prevent it from rattling.  
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any  
other combustible material in the  
engine compartment. Doing so  
may cause a heat-induced fire.  
• The support rod must be inserted  
completely into the hole whenev-  
er you inspect the engine com-  
partment. This will prevent the  
hood from falling and possibly  
injuring you.  
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm  
(1 ft.) above the closed position and let  
it drop. Make sure that it locks into  
place.  
• Do not move the vehicle with the  
hood raised. The view will be  
blocked and the hood could fall  
or be damaged.  
4 29  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 30  
Features of your vehicle  
FUEL FILLER LID  
Closing the fuel filler lid  
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until  
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is  
securely tightened.  
2. To close the lid, press the edge of the  
lid. Make sure it is securely closed.  
OJD042025  
OJD042026  
2. Fully open the lid (1).  
Opening the fuel filler lid  
3. To open the cap, turn it counterclock-  
wise (2).  
4. Refuel as needed.  
1. To open the lid, press the center edge  
of the lid when all doors are unlocked.  
✽
NOTICE  
The lid will open and close only when all  
doors are unlocked.  
✽
NOTICE  
If the fuel-filler lid does not open because  
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or  
push on the lid to break the ice and  
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If  
necessary, spray around the lid with an  
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-  
tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a  
warm place and allow the ice to melt.  
4 30  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 31  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
WARNING - Refueling  
WARNING - Refueling dan-  
gers  
• Do not get back into a vehicle  
once you have begun refueling  
since you can generate static  
electricity by touching, rubbing  
or sliding against any item or fab-  
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)  
capable of producing static elec-  
tricity. Static electricity discharge  
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in  
rapid burning. If you must re-  
enter the vehicle, you should  
once again eliminate potentially  
dangerous static electricity dis-  
charge by touching a metal part  
of the vehicle, away from the fuel  
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-  
line source.  
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it  
can cover your clothes or skin  
and thus subject you to the risk  
of fire and burns. Always remove  
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.  
If the cap is venting fuel or if you  
hear a hissing sound, wait until  
the condition stops before com-  
pletely removing the cap.  
Automotive fuels are flammable  
materials. When refueling, please  
note the following guidelines care-  
fully. Failure to follow these guide-  
lines may result in severe personal  
injury, severe burns or death by fire  
or explosion.  
• Read and follow all warning post-  
ed at the gas station facility.  
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle  
automatically shuts off when  
refueling.  
• Before refueling note the location  
of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-  
Off, if available, at the gas station  
facility.  
• Always check that the fuel cap is  
installed securely to prevent fuel  
spillage in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,  
you should eliminate potentially  
dangerous static electricity dis-  
charge by touching another metal  
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-  
tance away from the fuel filler  
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.  
• When  
using  
an  
approved  
portable fuel container, be sure to  
place the container on the  
ground prior to refueling. Static  
electricity discharge from the  
container can ignite fuel vapors  
causing a fire. Once refueling has  
begun, contact with the vehicle  
should be maintained until the  
filling is complete.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
4 31  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 32  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
CAUTION  
Use only portable plastic fuel  
containers designed to carry and  
store gasoline.  
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-  
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-  
cle, and immediately contact the  
manager of the gas station and  
then contact the local fire depart-  
ment. Follow any safety instruc-  
tions they provide.  
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle  
according to the "Fuel require-  
ments" suggested in chapter 1.  
• Do not use cellular phones while  
refueling. Electric current and/or  
electronic interference from cel-  
lular phones can potentially  
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.  
• If the fuel filler cap requires  
replacement, please make sure  
that you use parts designed for  
replacement in your vehicle. An  
incorrect fuel filler cap can result  
in a serious malfunction of the  
fuel system or emission control  
system. For more detailed infor-  
mation, we recommend that you  
contact an authorized Kia dealer.  
• When refueling, always shut the  
engine off. Sparks produced by  
electrical components related to  
the engine can ignite fuel vapors  
causing a fire. Once refueling is  
complete, check to make sure the  
filler cap and filler door are  
securely closed, before starting  
the engine.  
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior  
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type  
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces  
may damage the paint.  
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter  
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit  
cigarette in your vehicle while at  
a gas station especially during  
refueling. Automotive fuel is  
highly flammable and can, when  
ignited, result in fire.  
• After refueling, make sure the fuel  
cap is installed securely to pre-  
vent fuel spillage in the event of  
an accident.  
(Continued)  
4 32  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 33  
Features of your vehicle  
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof  
may not work properly due to freezing  
conditions.  
• After the vehicle is washed or in a rain-  
storm, be sure to wipe off any water that  
is on the sunroof before operating it.  
CAUTION - Sunroof control  
lever  
Do not continue to move the sun-  
roof control lever after the sunroof  
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.  
Damage to the motor or system  
components could occur.  
OJD042027  
OJD042078/OJD042215  
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,  
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the  
sunroof control lever located on the over-  
head console.  
Sunroof open warning  
(if equipped)  
If the driver removes the ignition key  
(smart key: turns off the engine) and  
opens the driver-side door when the sun-  
roof is not fully closed, the warning chime  
will sound for approximately 7 seconds  
and a warning message will appear on  
the LCD display.  
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,  
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the  
ON position.  
Close the sunroof securely when leaving  
your vehicle.  
4 33  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 34  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD042028  
OJD042029  
OJD042030  
Sunshade  
Sliding the sunroof  
Tilting the sunroof  
• To open the sunshade, press the sun-  
shade control switch(1).  
When the sunshade is closed  
When the sunshade is closed  
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-  
ward, the sunshade will slide all the way  
open then the sunroof glass will slide all  
the way open. To stop the sunroof move-  
ment at any point, pull or push the sun-  
roof control lever momentarily.  
If you push the sunroof control lever  
upward, the sunshade will slide all the  
way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.  
• To close the sunshade when the sun-  
roof glass is closed.  
- Press the sunshade control switch(2).  
To stop the sunroof movement at any  
point, pull or push the sunroof control  
lever momentarily.  
- Push the sunroof control lever for-  
ward or pull it down.  
To stop the sliding at any point, press the  
sunshade control switch momentarily.  
When the sunshade is opened  
When the sunshade is opened  
If you push the sunroof control lever  
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.  
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-  
ward, the sunroof glass will slide all the  
way open. To stop the sunroof movement  
at any point, pull or push the sunroof con-  
trol lever momentarily.  
To stop the sunroof movement at any  
point, pull or push the sunroof control  
lever momentarily.  
4 34  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 35  
Features of your vehicle  
Closing the sunroof  
WARNING - Sunroof  
To close the sunroof glass with the  
sunshade  
• Be careful that someone’s head,  
hands and body are not trapped by  
a closing sunroof.  
Push the sunroof control lever forward or  
full it down.  
• Do not extend the face, neck, arms  
or body outside through an  
opened sunroof while driving.  
The sunroof glass will close.  
Then to close sunshade  
- Press the sunshade control switch(2).  
• Make sure your hands and face are  
safely out of the way before clos-  
ing a sunroof.  
- Push the sunroof control lever forward  
or full it down  
To stop the sunroof movement at any  
point, pull or push the sunroof control  
lever momentarily.  
• A panorama sunroof is made of  
glass, therefore it may break in an  
accident. If you do not have your  
seat belt on, you may stick out of  
the broken glass and get injured or  
killed. For all passengers safety,  
have an appropriate protection on.  
(ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.)  
OYF049215  
Automatic reversal  
If an object or part of the body is detect-  
ed while the sunroof glass or sunshade is  
closing automatically, it will reverse the  
direction, and then stop.  
The auto reverse function does not work  
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding  
glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.  
You should always check that all passen-  
gers and objects are away from the sun-  
roof before closing it.  
CAUTION  
• Periodically remove any dirt that  
may accumulate on the guide rail.  
• If you try to open the sunroof when  
the temperature is below freezing  
or when the sunroof is covered  
with snow or ice, the glass or the  
motor could be damaged.  
• If you drive with the sunroof opened  
right after a car wash or rain, water  
may get inside the vehicle.  
4 35  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 36  
Features of your vehicle  
Resetting the sunroof  
✽
NOTICE  
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may  
not work properly.  
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-  
nected or discharged, or related fuse is  
blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-  
tem as follows:  
1.Turn the engine on and close the sun-  
roof glass and sunshade completely.  
2.Release the control lever.  
3.Push the sunroof control lever forward in  
the direction of close (about 10 seconds)  
until the sunroof operates as follows;  
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN  
Then, release the control lever.  
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward  
in the direction of close until the sun-  
roof operates as follows;  
SUNSHADE & SLIDE OPEN SIMUL-  
TANEOUSLY → SLIDE CLOSE →  
SUNSHADE CLOSE  
Then, release the control lever.  
When this is complete, the sunroof  
system is reset.  
For more detailed information, we recom-  
mend that you contact an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
4 36  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 37  
Features of your vehicle  
STEERING WHEEL  
(Continued)  
Electronic power steering  
✽
NOTICE  
• If an error is detected in the electric  
power steering system, EPS will stop  
assisting driver in steering the vehicle to  
prevent accidents and the warning light  
on the cluster will illuminate or blink.  
We recommend that the system be  
checked by an authorized Kia dealer as  
soon as possible.  
• When you operate the steering wheel in  
low temperature, abnormal noise could  
occur. If temperature rises, the noise  
will disappear. This is a normal condi-  
tion.  
• When the vehicle is stationary, if you  
turn the steering wheel all the way to  
the left or right continuously, the  
steering wheel becomes heavier from  
the end. This is not a system malfunc-  
tion but for your safety. As time pass-  
es, the steering wheel returns to its  
normal condition.  
• When the charging system warning  
light comes on or the voltage is low  
(When the alternator (or battery) does  
not operate normally or it malfunc-  
tions), the steering wheel may get  
heavy and become difficult to control  
operate abnormally.  
Power steering uses the motor to assist  
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine  
is off or if the power steering system  
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may  
still be steered, but it will require  
increased steering effort.  
The following symptoms may occur dur-  
ing normal vehicle operation:  
• The EPS warning light does not illu-  
minate.  
• The steering effort is high immediate-  
ly after turning the ignition switch on.  
This happens as the system performs  
the EPS system diagnostics. When the  
diagnostics is completed, the steering  
wheel will return to its normal condi-  
tion.  
• A click noise may be heard from the  
EPS relay after the ignition switch is  
turned to the ON or LOCK/OFF posi-  
tion.  
• Motor noise may be heard when the  
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving  
speed.  
The electronic power steering is con-  
trolled by the power steering control unit  
which senses the steering wheel torque  
and vehicle speed to command the  
motor.  
The steering effort becomes heavier as  
the vehicle’s speed increases and  
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed  
decreases for better control of the steer-  
ing wheel.  
Should you notice any change in the  
effort required to steer during normal  
vehicle operation, we recommend that  
the system be checked by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
• The steering effort increases if the  
steering wheel is rotated continuously  
when the vehicle is not in motion.  
However, after a few minutes, it will  
return to its normal conditions.  
(Continued)  
4 37  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 38  
Features of your vehicle  
Tilt and telescopic steering  
A tilt and telescopic steering wheel  
allows you to adjust the steering wheel  
before you drive. You can also raise it to  
give your legs more room when you exit  
and enter the vehicle.  
The steering wheel should be positioned  
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,  
while permitting you to see the instru-  
ment panel warning lights and gauges.  
OJD042031  
OJD042083  
WARNING  
To change the steering wheel angle, pull  
down the lock release lever (1), adjust the  
steering wheel to the desired angle (2)  
and height (3), then pull up the lock-  
release lever to lock the steering wheel in  
place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel  
to the desired position before driving.  
Heated steering wheel  
(if equipped)  
• Never adjust the angle and height  
of steering wheel while driving.  
You may lose your steering con-  
trol and cause severe personal  
injury or accidents.  
With the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion, pressing the heated steering wheel  
button warms the steering wheel.  
• After adjusting, push the steering  
wheel both up and down to be  
certain it is locked in position.  
✽
NOTICE  
The heated steering wheel will turn off  
automatically approximately 30 minutes  
after the heated steering wheel is turned  
on.  
4 38  
                                                                                                                                                                            
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 39  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042032  
Horn  
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-  
bol on your steering wheel.  
Check the horn regularly to be sure it  
operates properly.  
✽
NOTICE  
To sound the horn, press the area indi-  
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-  
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn  
will operate only when this area is  
pressed.  
OJD042165/OJD042166/OJD042189/OJD042190  
The indicator on the button will illuminate and notify you on the LCD display.  
To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on  
the button will turn off and notify you on the LCD display.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel.This causes damage to  
the heated steering wheel system.  
Do not strike the horn severely to  
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do  
not press on the horn with a sharp-  
pointed object.  
4 39  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 40  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
OJD042167  
OJD042170  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042161  
Flex steering wheel (if equipped)  
The flex steering wheel controls steering  
effort as driver's preference or road con-  
dition.  
You can select the desired steering mode  
by pressing the steering mode button.  
OJD042239  
OJD042192  
When the steering mode button is  
pressed, the selected steering mode will  
appear on the LCD display.  
Normal mode  
The normal mode offers medium steer-  
ing effort.  
If the steering mode button is pressed  
within 4 seconds, the steering mode will  
change as above pictures.  
If the steering wheel mode button is not  
pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD dis-  
play will change to the previous screen.  
4 40  
                                                                                      
                                                                                                                                                                                
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 41  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
CAUTION  
• For your safety, if you press the  
steering mode button while oper-  
ating the steering wheel, the LCD  
display will change, but the steer-  
ing effort will not change immedi-  
ately. After operating the steering  
wheel, the steering effort will  
change automatically to the  
selected mode.  
OJD042169  
OJD042168  
• Be careful when changing the  
steering mode while driving.  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
• When the electronic power steer-  
ing is not working properly, the  
flex steering wheel will not work.  
OJD042191  
OJD042193  
Comfort mode  
Sport mode  
The steering wheel becomes lighter. The  
comfort mode is usually used when driv-  
ing in downtown or parking the vehicle.  
The steering wheel becomes heavier.  
The sport mode is usually used when  
driving in highway.  
Also, the comfort mode helps to drive  
easily with lower effort to steer the car.  
4 41  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 42  
Features of your vehicle  
MIRRORS  
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)  
(if equipped)  
Inside rearview mirror  
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the  
center view through the rear window is  
seen. Make this adjustment before you  
start driving.  
The electric rearview mirror automatical-  
ly controls the glare from the headlights  
of the car behind you in nighttime or low  
light driving conditions. The sensor  
mounted in the mirror senses the light  
level around the vehicle, and automati-  
cally controls the headlight glare from  
vehicles behind you.  
Night  
WARNING - Rear visibility  
Do not place objects in the rear  
seat or cargo area which would  
interfere with your vision out the  
rear window.  
When the engine is running, the glare is  
automatically controlled by the sensor  
mounted in the rearview mirror.  
Day  
OMD040031  
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R  
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically  
go to the brightest setting in order to  
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-  
cle.  
Day/night rearview mirror  
(if equipped)  
WARNING  
Do not adjust the rearview mirror  
while the vehicle is moving. This  
could result in loss of control, and  
an accident which could cause  
death, serious injury or property  
damage.  
Make this adjustment before you start  
driving and while the day/night lever is in  
the day position.  
Pull the day/night lever toward you to  
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-  
cles behind you during night driving.  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the mirror, use a  
paper towel or similar material  
dampened with glass cleaner. Do  
not spray glass cleaner directly on  
the mirror as that may cause the liq-  
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-  
ing.  
Remember that you lose some rearview  
clarity in the night position.  
WARNING  
Do not modify the inside mirror and  
do not install a wide mirror. It could  
result in injury, during an accident  
or deployment of the air bag.  
4 42  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:23 PM Page 43  
Features of your vehicle  
Outside rearview mirror  
CAUTION  
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before  
driving.  
Do not scrape ice off the mirror  
face; this may damage the surface  
of the glass. If ice should restrict  
movement of the mirror, do not  
force the mirror for adjustment. To  
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a  
sponge or soft cloth with very warm  
water.  
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-  
hand and right-hand outside rearview  
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted  
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-  
ror heads can be folded back to prevent  
damage during an automatic car wash or  
when passing in a narrow street.  
Indicator  
WARNING - Rearview mir-  
rors  
• The outside rearview mirror is  
convex. Objects seen in the mir-  
ror are closer than they appear.  
OMD040032  
CAUTION  
To operate the electric rearview mirror:  
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do  
not adjust the mirror by force. Use  
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-  
ator antifreeze) to release the  
frozen mechanism or move the  
vehicle to a warm place and allow  
the ice to melt.  
• Press the on/off button (1) to turn the  
automatic dimming function on. The  
mirror indicator light will illuminate.  
• Use your interior rearview mirror  
or direct observation to deter-  
mine the actual distance of fol-  
lowing vehicles when changing  
lanes.  
Press the on/off button to turn the auto-  
matic dimming function off. The mirror  
indicator light will turn off.  
• The mirror defaults to the ON position  
whenever the ignition switch is turned  
on.  
WARNING  
Do not adjust or fold the outside  
rearview mirrors while the vehicle  
is moving. This could result in loss  
of control, and an accident which  
could cause death, serious injury  
or property damage.  
4 43  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 44  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
• The mirrors stop moving when  
they reach the maximum adjust-  
ing angles, but the motor contin-  
ues to operate while the switch is  
pressed. Do not press the switch  
longer than necessary, the motor  
may be damaged.  
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-  
side rearview mirror by hand.  
Doing so may damage the parts.  
OJD042033  
OJD042034  
Remote control  
Folding the outside rearview mirror  
Manual type  
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the  
housing of mirror and then fold it toward  
the rear of the vehicle.  
The electric remote control mirror switch  
allows you to adjust the position of the  
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To  
adjust the position of either mirror, move  
the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to  
select the right side mirror or the left side  
mirror, then press a corresponding point  
on the mirror adjustment control to posi-  
tion the selected mirror up, down, left or  
right.  
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-  
tral (center) position to prevent inadver-  
tent adjustment.  
4 44  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 45  
Features of your vehicle  
The mirror will fold or unfold automatical-  
ly as follows:  
• Without smart key system  
CAUTION  
The electric type outside rearview  
mirror operates even though the  
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-  
tion. However, to prevent unneces-  
sary battery discharge, do not  
adjust the mirrors longer than nec-  
essary while the engine is not run-  
ning.  
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the  
door is locked or unlocked by the  
transmitter.  
• With smart key system  
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the  
door is locked or unlocked by the  
smart key.  
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the  
door is locked or unlocked by the but-  
ton on the outside door handle.  
OJD042035  
CAUTION  
Electric type  
In case it is an electric type outside  
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by  
hand. It could cause motor failure.  
- The mirror will unfold when you  
approach the vehicle (all doors closed  
and locked) with a smart key in pos-  
session.  
The outside rearview mirror can be fold-  
ed or unfolded by pressing the switch as  
below.  
Up (1) : The mirror will unfold.  
Down (2) : The mirror will fold.  
Center (AUTO, 3) :  
4 45  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 46  
Features of your vehicle  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (NORMAL VISION)  
1. Tachometer  
2. Speedometer  
3. Fuel gauge  
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)  
5. Turn signal indicators  
6. LCD display  
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ  
from the illustration.  
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the  
following pages.  
OJD042036  
4 46  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 47  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Gasoline Engine  
■ Diesel Engine  
OJD042040  
OJD042047  
OJD042044/OJD042045  
Tachometer  
The tachometer indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).  
Instrument panel illumination  
Gauges  
The instrument panel illumination intensity  
can be adjusted as follows:  
• Ignition switch in the ON position  
Speedometer  
The speedometer indicates the vehicle  
speed.  
Use the tachometer to select the correct  
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or  
over-revving the engine.  
• Pressing the upper or lower part of the  
switch  
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-  
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.  
The illumination intensity is shown on the  
instrument cluster LCD display.  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the engine within  
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This  
may cause severe engine damage.  
4 47  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 48  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING - Fuel gauge  
Running out of fuel can expose  
vehicle occupants to danger.  
You must stop and obtain addition-  
al fuel as soon as possible after the  
warning light comes on or when the  
gauge indicator comes close to the  
“O (Empty)” level.  
CAUTION  
OJD042046  
OJD042058  
Avoid driving with an extremely low  
fuel level. Running out of fuel could  
cause the engine to misfire damag-  
ing the catalytic converter.  
Fuel gauge  
Engine coolant temperature gauge  
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-  
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank.  
This gauge shows the temperature of the  
engine coolant when the ignition switch  
is ON.  
Do not continue driving with an overheat-  
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer  
to “If the engine overheats” in chapter 6.  
✽
NOTICE  
• The fuel tank capacity is given in  
chapter 8.  
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a  
low fuel warning light, which will illu-  
minate when the fuel tank is nearly  
empty.  
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge  
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning  
light may come on earlier than usual  
due to the movement of fuel in the tank.  
4 48  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 49  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
If the gauge pointer moves beyond  
the normal range area toward the  
“130°C”, it indicates overheating  
that may damage the engine.  
WARNING  
Never remove the radiator cap  
when the engine is hot. The engine  
coolant is under pressure and  
could cause severe burns. Wait  
until the engine is cool before  
adding coolant to the reservoir.  
OJD042231/OJD042232  
OJD042233  
Manual transaxle shift indicator  
(if equipped)  
This indicator informs you which gear is  
Automatic transaxle shift position  
indicator (if equipped)  
The indicator displays which automatic  
transaxle shift lever is selected.  
desired while driving to save fuel.  
For example  
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd  
gear is desired (currently the shift  
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).  
: Indicates that shifting down to the  
3rd gear is desired (currently the  
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).  
You can turn off the indicator. Refer to  
“User setting” in this chapter.  
4 49  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 50  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
■ Type B  
CAUTION - DCT  
• When the problem of gear system  
occurs, the transaxle indicator  
will blink. For your safety, we rec-  
ommend that you contact an  
authorized Kia dealer and have  
the system checked.  
• When the clutch is overheated,  
the safe protection mode oper-  
ates. According to the safe protec-  
tion mode, the transaxle indicator  
blinks with buzzer sound. The  
buzzer beeps 3 times. In this time,  
the LCD warning about safe pro-  
tection mode also displays. In this  
condition, the driving may not be  
smoothly. If you ignore this warn-  
ing, the driving condition is get-  
ting worse and the system may  
have problem. To return the nor-  
mal driving condition, apply the  
foot brake and stop the vehicle for  
few minutes before driving off.  
OJD042231/OJD042232  
OJD042234  
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator in  
sports mode (if equipped, For Europe)  
Double clutch transmission  
(DS mode) shift indicator  
(if equipped)  
In the Sports Mode, this indicator informs  
which gear is desired while driving to  
save fuel.  
The indicator displays which Double  
clutch transmission shift lever is selected.  
In DS mode, the “SPORTS” indicator dis-  
plays in cluster. For more detailed infor-  
mation about DS mode, refer to the chap-  
ter 5.  
For example  
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd  
gear is desired (currently the shift  
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).  
: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd  
gear is desired (currently the shift  
lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).  
* DCT : Double clutch transmission  
When the system is not working properly,  
the indicator is not displayed.  
4 50  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 51  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD052031  
OJD042051  
OJD042050  
Speed limiter indicator  
(if equipped)  
Odometer (km or mi.)  
Trip computer  
The odometer indicates the total dis-  
tance the vehicle has been driven.  
The trip computer is a microcomputer-  
controlled driver information system that  
displays information related to driving  
when the ignition switch is in the ON  
position. All stored driving information  
(except odometer, distance to empty and  
instant fuel economy) resets if the battery  
is disconnected.  
The indicator illuminates when the speed  
limit control system is enabled by move  
You will also find the odometer useful to  
determine when periodic maintenance  
should be performed.  
the  
lever up on the steering wheel.  
The indicator goes off when the  
up again to deactivate the system.  
lever  
If there is a problem with the speed limit  
control system, the “---” indicator will blink.  
If this occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
For more details, refer to “Speed limit  
control system” in chapter 5.  
The speed limiter indicators illuminates  
on the LCD display.  
4 51  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 52  
Features of your vehicle  
Press the ▲ or M button for less than 1  
second to select any mode as follows:  
Tripmeter A  
Tripmeter B  
Distance to empty*  
Average fuel consumption*  
Instant fuel consumption*  
Average speed*  
OJD042052  
OJD042053  
Tripmeter (km or mi.)  
Distance to empty (km or mi.)  
This mode indicates the distance of indi-  
vidual trips selected since the last trip-  
meter reset.  
This mode indicates the estimated dis-  
tance the vehicle can be driven with the  
remaining fuel. When the remaining dis-  
tance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will  
be displayed.  
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to  
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).  
Elapsed time*  
The meter’s working range is from 50 to  
999 km (30 to 999 miles).  
Pressing the button for more than 1  
second, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).  
Engine coolant temperature gauge  
Service*  
User setting*  
* : if equipped  
4 52  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 53  
Features of your vehicle  
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of  
“User Setting” is in the “Auto Reset”  
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after  
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel  
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).  
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of  
“User Setting” is in the “Manual Reset”  
Pressing the  
button for more than 1  
second, when the average fuel consump-  
tion is displayed, clears the average fuel  
consumption to zero (--.-).  
OJD042054  
OJD042055  
Average fuel economy (if equipped)  
(L/100 km or MPG)  
Instant fuel economy (if equipped)  
(L/100 km or MPG)  
This mode calculates the average fuel  
consumption from the total fuel used and  
the distance since the last average fuel  
economy reset. The total fuel used is cal-  
culated from the fuel consumption input.  
For an accurate calculation, drive more  
than 50 m (0.03 miles).  
This mode calculates the instant fuel con-  
sumption during the last few seconds.  
To clear the average fuel economy to  
zero (--.-), do as follow;  
4 53  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 54  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or  
the battery power has been interrupt-  
ed, the “Distance to empty” function  
may not operate correctly.  
The trip computer may not register  
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6  
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.  
• The fuel economy and distance to  
empty may vary significantly based  
on driving conditions, driving habits,  
and condition of the vehicle.  
• The distance to empty is an estimate  
of the available driving distance. This  
value may differ from the actual driv-  
ing distance.  
OJD042056  
OJD042057  
Average speed (km/h or MPH)  
Elapsed time  
This mode indicates the total time trav-  
eled since the last driving time reset.  
This mode calculates the average speed  
of the vehicle since the last average  
speed reset.  
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the  
driving time keeps going while the engine  
is running.  
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the  
average speed keeps going while the  
engine is running.  
The meter’s working range is from  
0:00~99:59.  
Pressing the  
button for more than 1  
second, when the average speed is dis-  
played, clears the average speed to zero  
(---).  
Pressing the  
button for more than 1  
second, when the driving time is being  
displayed, clears the driving time to zero  
(0:00).  
4 54  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 55  
Features of your vehicle  
If you want to change the interval of the  
maintenance service schedule, we rec-  
ommend that you consult an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
✽
NOTICE  
• If you reset the maintenance schedule,  
when the displayed service schedule  
has not elapsed or elapsed without  
actual vehicle service, the displayed  
service schedule on the LCD display  
might not be match the actual service  
schedule anymore.  
OJD042059  
OJD042061  
You should comply with the displayed  
service schedule on the LCD display  
for the maintenance of your vehicle.  
• If the battery is disconnected or dis-  
charged, the displayed service sched-  
ule might not match the actual service  
schedule.  
Service mode  
If you do not have your vehicle serviced  
according to the scheduled maintenance  
service on the LCD display, this LCD dis-  
play will show the elapsed mileage or  
days.  
This mode calculates when you need a  
scheduled maintenance service (mileage  
or days)  
If you want to see the service mode when  
other modes are displayed, press the ▲  
or M button less than 1 second.  
If you want to reset the maintenance  
schedule, when the service required mes-  
sage is displayed :  
- Press the  
onds.  
button more than 5 sec-  
- "  
: Reset" will be shown on the LCD  
display.  
- Press the  
second.  
button again more than 1  
If you do not press the  
button within 5  
seconds, " : Reset" will disappear.  
4 55  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 56  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD042060  
OJD042063  
OJD042064  
If service mode is not activated, the LCD  
display shows, like the above picture.  
User Settings  
In this mode there are 3 kinds of the sub-  
menu.  
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition  
switch in the ON position or engine  
running.  
In this case, we recommend that you  
consult an authorized Kia dealer.  
2. Press the ▲ or M button until the User  
setting mode is displayed.  
3. With the User setting mode displayed,  
press the  
changed.  
4.You can change the item by pressing  
button until the screen is  
the ▲ or M button and select an item  
by pressing the  
button.  
4 56  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 57  
Features of your vehicle  
Door Menu  
• Auto Door Lock  
Off - The auto door lock operation will be  
canceled.  
Lamp Menu  
• Headlamp delay (if equipped)  
If the headlamp delay function is checked :  
Settings Menu  
• Seat Easy Access (for Driver Position  
Memory System equipped vehicle)  
(if equipped)  
If the seat easy access function is  
checked :  
The Headlamp delay and Headlamp  
Welcome function will be activated.  
Speed - All doors will be automatically  
locked when the vehicle speed  
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).  
The driver's seat will automatically move  
forward or rearward for the driver to enter  
or exit the vehicle comfortably.  
• Welcome Light (if equipped)  
If the welcome light function is checked :  
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-  
cally locked if the shift lever  
is shifted from the P(Park)  
position to the R(Reverse),  
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) posi-  
tion. (for automatic transaxle  
shift lever)  
The welcome light function of puddle  
lamp will activate.  
• Steering position (if equipped)  
If the steering position function is  
checked:  
• Auto Triple Turn  
(One-touch triple turn signal)  
If the auto triple turn function is checked :  
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-  
play when the steering wheel is not  
aligned with the ENGINE STRAT/STOP  
button in the ON position.  
The lane change signals will blink 3 times  
when the turn signal lever is moved  
slightly.  
• Auto Door Unlock  
Off - The auto door unlock operation will  
be canceled.  
Key Out - All doors will be automatically  
unlocked when the ignition key  
is removed from ignition switch  
(or smart key is in the OFF  
position).  
• Shift indicator (for manual transaxle)  
If the shift indicator function is checked :  
The shift indicator function will be activated.  
For more details, refer to “Manual  
transaxle shift indicator” in this chapter.  
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-  
cally unlocked if the shift  
lever is shifted to the  
P(Park) position. (for auto-  
matic transaxle shift lever)  
4 57  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 58  
Features of your vehicle  
• AVG fuel ECO Reset  
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy  
will reset automatically  
when you drive after refuel-  
ing.  
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-  
my will not reset auto-  
matically when you drive  
after refueling. You can  
reset the average fuel  
economy by pressing  
the  
button for more  
than 1 second when the  
average fuel economy is  
displayed.  
• Language  
Choose the language you prefer within  
the LCD display.  
4 58  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 59  
Features of your vehicle  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (SUPERVISION)  
■ Type A  
1. Tachometer  
2. Speedometer  
3. Fuel gauge  
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)  
5. Turn signal indicators  
6. LCD display  
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ  
from the illustration.  
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the  
following pages.  
OJD042038L  
4 59  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 60  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type B (for T-GDI engine)  
• Analog Mode  
1. Tachometer  
2. Speedometer  
3. Fuel gauge  
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)  
5. Turn signal indicators  
6. LCD display  
7. Engine torque gauge  
8. Turbo boost pressure gauge  
9. Engine coolant temperature gauge  
• Digital Mode  
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ  
from the illustration.  
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the  
following pages.  
OJD043038/OJD043248  
4 60  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 61  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Gasoline Engine  
■ Diesel Engine  
OJD042047  
OJD043161  
OJD042044/OJD042045  
Instrument panel illumination  
Cluster display mode conversion  
(for T-GDI engine)  
Gauges  
The instrument panel illumination intensity  
can be adjusted as follows:  
• Ignition switch in the ON position  
Tachometer  
The tachometer indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).  
You can switch the display mode "Analog"  
or "Digital" with pressing the button.  
• Pressing the upper or lower part of the  
switch  
Use the tachometer to select the correct  
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or  
over-revving the engine.  
The illumination intensity is shown on the  
instrument cluster LCD display.  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the engine within  
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This  
may cause severe engine damage.  
4 61  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 62  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type C  
• km/h  
■ Type A  
OJD042042  
OJD043507  
■ Type B  
• km/h  
• MPH  
OJD042046  
Fuel gauge  
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-  
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank.  
✽
NOTICE  
• The fuel tank capacity is given in  
chapter 8.  
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a  
low fuel warning light, which will illu-  
minate when the fuel tank is nearly  
empty.  
OJD043505  
OJD043508  
• MPH  
Speedometer  
The speedometer indicates the vehicle  
speed.  
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-  
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.  
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge  
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning  
light may come on earlier than usual  
due to the movement of fuel in the tank.  
OJD043506  
4 62  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:24 PM Page 63  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING - Fuel gauge  
Running out of fuel can expose  
vehicle occupants to danger.  
You must stop and obtain addition-  
al fuel as soon as possible after the  
warning light comes on or when the  
gauge indicator comes close to the  
“O (Empty)” level.  
CAUTION  
OJD043249  
OJD043251  
Avoid driving with an extremely low  
fuel level. Running out of fuel could  
cause the engine to misfire damag-  
ing the catalytic converter.  
Engine torque gauge  
(for T-GDI engine)  
Turbo boost pressure gauge  
(for T-GDI engine)  
It shows instantaneous change of the  
Torque by rpm.  
It shows instantaneous change of the  
turbo boost pressure.  
4 63  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 64  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
CAUTION  
If the gauge pointer moves beyond  
the normal range area toward the  
“130°C” position, it indicates over-  
heating that may damage the engine.  
WARNING  
Never remove the radiator cap  
when the engine is hot. The engine  
coolant is under pressure and  
could cause severe burns. Wait  
until the engine is cool before  
adding coolant to the reservoir.  
OJD042176  
■ Type B  
OJD042236/OJD042237  
Manual transaxle shift indicator  
This indicator informs you which gear is  
desired while driving to save fuel.  
For example  
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd  
gear is desired (currently the shift  
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).  
: Indicates that shifting down to the  
3rd gear is desired (currently the  
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).  
OJD043250  
Engine coolant temperature gauge  
This gauge shows the temperature of the  
engine coolant when the ignition switch  
is ON.  
Do not continue driving with an overheat-  
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer  
to “If the engine overheats” in chapter 6.  
4 64  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 65  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD042235  
OJD042236/OJD042237  
OJD042238  
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator in  
sports mode (if equipped, For Europe)  
Automatic transaxle shift position  
indicator (if equipped)  
Double clutch transmission  
(DS mode) shift indicator  
(if equipped)  
In the Sports Mode, this indicator informs  
which gear is desired while driving to  
save fuel.  
The indicator displays which automatic  
transaxle shift lever is selected.  
The indicator displays which Double  
clutch transmission shift lever is selected.  
For example  
In DS mode, the “S” indicator displays  
with “SPORTS” indicator in cluster. For  
more detailed information about DS  
mode, refer to the chapter 5.  
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd  
gear is desired (currently the shift  
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).  
: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd  
gear is desired (currently the shift  
lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).  
When the system is not working properly,  
the indicator is not displayed.  
4 65  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 66  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
CAUTION - DCT  
• When the problem of gear system  
occurs, the transaxle indicator  
will blink. For your safety, we rec-  
ommend that you contact an  
authorized Kia dealer and have  
the system checked.  
• When the clutch is overheated,  
the safe protection mode oper-  
ates. According to the safe protec-  
tion mode, the transaxle indicator  
blinks with buzzer sound. The  
buzzer beeps 3 times. In this time,  
the LCD warning about safe pro-  
tection mode also displays. In this  
condition, the driving may not be  
smoothly. If you ignore this warn-  
ing, the driving condition is get-  
ting worse and the system may  
have problem. To return the nor-  
mal driving condition, apply the  
foot brake and stop the vehicle for  
few minutes before driving off.  
OJD042173  
■ Type B  
OJD052043  
Speed limiter indicator  
(if equipped)  
The indicator illuminates when the speed  
limit control system is enabled by move  
the  
lever up on the steering wheel.  
The indicator goes off when the  
up again to deactivate the system.  
lever  
If there is a problem with the speed limit  
control system, the “---” indicator will blink.  
If this occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
OJD043504  
Odometer (km or mi.)  
The odometer indicates the total dis-  
tance the vehicle has been driven.  
❈ DCT : Double clutch transmission  
For more details, refer to “Speed limit  
control system” in chapter 5.  
You will also find the odometer useful to  
determine when periodic maintenance  
should be performed.  
The speed limiter indicators illuminates  
on the LCD display.  
4 66  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 67  
Features of your vehicle  
Press the button for less than 1 sec-  
ond to select any group as follows :  
Trip mode  
Press the  
button for less than 1  
M
second to select in Trip mode group  
as follows :  
Engine coolant temperature gauge*  
Driving information mode  
Trip mode A  
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING  
SYSTEM*  
OJD042172  
Trip computer  
Service mode  
Trip mode B  
The trip computer is a microcomputer-  
controlled driver information system that  
displays information related to driving  
when the ignition switch is in the ON  
position.  
User setting mode  
* : if equipped  
4 67  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 68  
Features of your vehicle  
2. Average fuel economy  
(L/100 km or MPG)  
3. Instant fuel economy  
(L/100 km or MPG)  
This mode calculates the average fuel  
consumption from the total fuel used and  
the distance since the last average fuel  
economy reset. The total fuel used is cal-  
culated from the fuel consumption input.  
For an accurate calculation, drive more  
than 50 m (0.03 miles).  
This mode calculates the instant fuel  
consumption during the last few sec-  
onds.  
✽
NOTICE  
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or  
the battery power has been interrupt-  
ed, the “Distance to empty” function  
may not operate correctly.  
To clear the average fuel economy to  
zero (--.-), do as follow;  
The trip computer may not register  
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6  
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.  
• The fuel economy and distance to  
empty may vary significantly based  
on driving conditions, driving habits,  
and condition of the vehicle.  
• The distance to empty is an estimate  
of the available driving distance. This  
value may differ from the actual driv-  
ing distance.  
OJD042175  
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of  
“User Setting” is in the “Auto Reset”  
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after  
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel  
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).  
Driving information mode  
This mode indicates 3 kinds of driving  
Information.  
All stored driving information (except  
odometer, distance to empty and instant  
fuel economy) resets if the battery is dis-  
connected.  
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of  
“User Setting” is in the “Manual Reset”  
Pressing the  
button for more than 1  
second, when the average fuel consump-  
tion is displayed, clears the average fuel  
consumption to zero (--.-).  
1. Distance to empty (km or mi.)  
This mode indicates the estimated dis-  
tance the vehicle can be driven with the  
remaining fuel. When the remaining dis-  
tance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will  
be displayed.  
The meter’s working range is from 50 to  
999 km (30 to 999 miles).  
4 68  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 69  
Features of your vehicle  
2. Average speed (km/h or MPH)  
This mode calculates the average speed  
of the vehicle since the last average  
speed reset.  
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the  
average speed keeps going while the  
engine is running.  
Pressing the  
button for more than 1  
second, when the average speed is dis-  
played, clears the average speed to zero  
(---).  
OJD042174  
OJD042180  
3. Elapsed time  
This mode indicates the total time trav-  
eled since the last driving time reset.  
Trip mode (A, B)  
This mode indicates 3 kinds of driving  
Information.  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Mode (if equipped)  
This mode displays the state of the Lane  
Departure Warning System (LDWS).  
For more details, refer to “Lane departure  
warning system” in chapter 5.  
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the  
driving time keeps going while the engine  
is running.  
All stored driving information (except  
odometer, distance to empty and instant  
fuel economy) resets if the battery is dis-  
connected.  
The meter’s working range is from  
0:00~99:59.  
Pressing the  
button for more than 1  
1. Tripmeter (km or mi.)  
second, when the driving time is being  
displayed, clears the driving time to zero  
(0:00).  
This mode indicates the distance of indi-  
vidual trips selected since the last trip-  
meter reset.  
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to  
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).  
Pressing the button for more than 1  
second, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).  
4 69  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 70  
Features of your vehicle  
If you want to change the interval of the  
maintenance service schedule, we rec-  
ommend that you consult an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
✽
NOTICE  
• If you reset the maintenance schedule,  
when the displayed service schedule  
has not elapsed or elapsed without  
actual vehicle service, the displayed  
service schedule on the LCD display  
might not be match the actual service  
schedule anymore.  
OJD042186  
OJD042184  
You should comply with the displayed  
service schedule on the LCD display  
for the maintenance of your vehicle.  
• If the battery is disconnected or dis-  
charged, the displayed service sched-  
ule might not match the actual service  
schedule.  
Service mode  
If you do not have your vehicle serviced  
according to the scheduled maintenance  
service on the LCD display, this LCD dis-  
play will show the elapsed mileage or days.  
This mode calculates when you need a  
scheduled maintenance service (mileage  
or days)  
If you want to see the service mode when  
other modes are displayed, press the  
button less than 1 second.  
If you want to reset the maintenance  
schedule, when the service required mes-  
sage is displayed :  
- Press the  
onds.  
button more than 5 sec-  
- "  
: Reset" will be shown on the LCD  
display.  
- Press the  
second.  
button again more than 1  
If you do not press the  
button within  
5 seconds, " : Reset" will disappear.  
4 70  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 71  
Features of your vehicle  
Door Menu  
• Auto Door Lock  
Off - The auto door lock operation will be  
canceled.  
Speed - All doors will be automatically  
locked when the vehicle speed  
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).  
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-  
cally locked if the shift lever  
is shifted from the P(Park)  
position to the R(Reverse),  
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) posi-  
tion. (for automatic transaxle  
shift lever)  
OJD042185  
OJD042187  
If service mode is not activated, the LCD  
display shows, like the above picture.  
User Settings  
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition  
switch in the ON position or engine  
running.  
In this case, we recommend that you  
consult an authorized Kia dealer.  
• Auto Door Unlock  
Off - The auto door unlock operation will  
be canceled.  
2. Press the  
ting mode is displayed.  
button until the User set-  
Key Out - All doors will be automatically  
unlocked when the ignition key  
is removed from ignition switch  
(or smart key is in the OFF  
position).  
3.You can change the item by pressing  
the  
button and select an item by  
M
pressing the  
button.  
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-  
cally unlocked if the shift  
lever is shifted to the  
P(Park) position. (for auto-  
matic transaxle shift lever)  
4 71  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 72  
Features of your vehicle  
Lamp Menu  
• Headlamp delay (if equipped)  
If the headlamp delay function is checked :  
Settings Menu  
• AVG fuel ECO Reset  
• Seat Easy Access (for Driver Position  
Memory System equipped vehicle)  
(if equipped)  
If the seat easy access function is  
checked:  
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy  
will reset automatically  
when you drive after refuel-  
ing.  
The Headlamp delay and Headlamp  
Welcome function will be activated.  
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-  
my will not reset auto-  
matically when you drive  
The driver's seat will automatically move  
forward or rearward for the driver to enter  
or exit the vehicle comfortably.  
• Auto Triple Turn  
(One-touch triple turn signal)  
If the auto triple turn function is checked :  
after refueling. You can  
reset the average fuel  
economy by pressing  
the  
than 1 second when the  
average fuel economy is  
displayed.  
The lane change signals will blink 3 times  
when the turn signal lever is moved  
slightly.  
• Welcome Sound  
If the welcome sound function is checked :  
button for more  
The Welcome Sound function will be acti-  
vated.  
• Welcome Light (if equipped)  
If the welcome light function is checked :  
The welcome light function of puddle  
lamp will activate.  
• Steering Position (if equipped)  
If the steering position function is  
checked:  
• Speed Gauge Scale (if equipped)  
- 100% : The size of the numbers on  
speed gauge is normal state.  
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-  
play when the steering wheel is not  
aligned with the ENGINE STRAT/STOP  
button in the ON position.  
- 110% : The size of the numbers on  
speed gauge will increase.  
• Unit  
You can choose the displayed unit in the  
instrument cluster “km” or “mile”.  
• Language  
Choose the language you prefer within  
the LCD display.  
4 72  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 73  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042078/OJD042215  
OJD042240/OJD042188  
OJD042079/OJD042214  
Illumination intensity  
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH" (mode switch)  
LCD display information  
Sunroof open  
The illumination intensity of the instru-  
ment panel is shown when adjusting it  
with the illumination control switch.  
The notice appears to inform the driver to  
turn on the fuse switch in the instrument  
panel under the steering wheel.  
If driver removes the ignition key (Smart  
key : turns off the engine) and opens the  
driver-side door when the sunroof is not  
fully closed, warning message will appear  
on the LCD display. Also, the warning  
chime sounds for approximately 7 sec-  
onds.  
For more details, refer to “Instrument  
panel illumination” in chapter 4.  
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in chap-  
ter 7.  
4 73  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:25 PM Page 74  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042163/OJD042196  
OJD042164/OJD042211  
OJD042073/OJD042205  
Parking assist warning (if equipped)  
Displays the area an obstacle is detected  
while moving forward or rearward.  
Align steering wheel (if equipped)  
For vehicle’s equipped with smart  
key system  
Key not in vehicle  
If you start the engine when the steering  
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the left (or  
right) after a couple of seconds, “Align  
steering wheel” illuminates on the LCD  
display for 5 seconds.  
For more details, refer to “Parking assist  
system” in chapter 4.  
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and  
if any door is opened or closed with the  
engine start/stop button in the ACC, ON,  
or START position, the warning illumi-  
nates on the LCD display. Also, the chime  
sounds for 5 seconds when the smart  
key is not in the vehicle and the door is  
closed.  
Turn the steering wheel to the right (or left)  
and make it turned to the left (or right) less  
than 30 degrees.  
Always have the smart key with you.  
4 74  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 75  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042072/OJD042204  
OJD042075/OJD042207  
OJD042066/OJD042198  
Key not detected  
Press start button with smart key  
Low key battery  
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is  
not detected and you press the engine  
start/stop button, the warning illuminates  
on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also,  
the immobilizer indicator blinks for 10  
seconds.  
If you press the engine start/stop button  
while the warning “Key not detected” illu-  
minates the warning “Press the start but-  
ton with smart key” illuminates for 10 sec-  
onds on the LCD display. Also, the immo-  
bilizer indicator blinks for 10 seconds.  
If the engine start/stop button changes to  
the OFF position when the smart key in  
the vehicle discharges, the warning illu-  
minates on the LCD display for about 10  
seconds. Also, the warning chime  
sounds once.  
Replace the battery with a new one.  
4 75  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 76  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042070/OJD042202  
OJD042071/OJD042203  
OJD042065/OJD042197  
Press brake pedal to start engine  
(for automatic transaxle)  
Press clutch pedal to start engine  
(for manual transaxle)  
Shift to "P" position  
(for automatic transaxle)  
If the engine start/stop button changes to  
the ACC position twice by pressing the  
button repeatedly without depressing the  
brake pedal, the warning illuminates on  
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to  
indicate that you should depress the  
brake pedal to start the engine.  
If the engine start/stop button turns to the  
ACC position twice by pressing the but-  
ton repeatedly without depressing the  
clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on  
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to  
indicate that you should depress the  
clutch pedal to start the engine.  
If you try to turn off the engine without the  
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the  
engine start/stop button will turn to the  
ACC position. If the button is pressed  
once more it will turn to the ON position.  
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-  
play for about 10 seconds to indicate that  
you should press the engine start/stop  
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)  
position to turn off the engine.  
Also, the warning chime sounds for about  
10 seconds. (if equipped)  
4 76  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 77  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042074/OJD042206  
OJD042077/OJD042209  
OJD042067/OJD042199  
Press start button again  
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine  
Press start button while turn steering  
(if equipped)  
If you can not operate the engine  
start/stop button when there is a problem  
with the engine start/stop button system,  
the warning illuminates for 10 seconds  
and the chime sounds continuously to  
indicate that you could start the engine  
by pressing the engine start/stop button  
once more.  
If you try to start the engine with the shift  
lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)  
position, the warning illuminates for  
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.  
If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-  
mally when the engine start/stop button  
is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10  
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the  
warning chime sounds once and the  
engine start/stop button light blinks for 10  
seconds.  
You can also start the engine with the  
shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but  
for your safety start the engine with the  
shift lever in the P(Park) position.  
The chime will stop if the engine  
start/stop button system works normally  
or the theft alarm system is armed.  
When you are warned, press the engine  
start/stop button while turning the steer-  
ing wheel right and left.  
If the warning illuminates each time you  
press the engine start/stop button, we  
recommend that the system be checked  
by an authorized Kia dealer.  
4 77  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 78  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Normal vision  
■ Normal vision  
■ Supervision  
■ Supervision  
OJD042069/OJD042201  
OJD042076/OJD042208  
OJD043509  
Check steering wheel lock system  
(if equipped)  
Check "BRAKE SWITCH" fuse  
Torque reduced due to overheating (for  
T-GDI engine)  
When the engine coolant temperature  
exceeds 115°C, this message will be dis-  
played and the torque will be reduced to  
protect the engine.  
When the brake switch fuse is discon-  
nected, the warning illuminates for 10  
seconds on the LCD display.  
If the steering wheel does not lock nor-  
mally when the engine start/stop button  
changes to the OFF position, the warning  
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD  
display. Also, the warning chime sounds  
for 3 seconds and the engine start/stop  
button light blinks for 10 seconds.  
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that  
is not possible you can start the engine  
by pressing the engine start/stop button  
for 10 seconds in ACC.  
4 78  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 79  
Features of your vehicle  
Active ECO indicator  
(if equipped)  
Air bag warning light  
Warnings and indicators  
(Instrument cluster)  
ECO  
All warning lights are checked by turning  
the ignition switch ON (do not start the  
engine). If any light that does not illumi-  
nate, we recommend that the system be  
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.  
When the active ECO is operating the  
ECO indicator illuminates green. For  
more detailed information, refer to  
"Active ECO" in chapter 5.  
This warning light will illuminate for  
approximately 6 seconds each time you  
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-  
tion.  
After starting the engine, check to make  
sure that all warning lights are off. If any  
are still on, this indicates a situation that  
needs attention.  
This light also comes on when the SRS  
is not working properly. If the air bag  
warning light does not come on, or con-  
tinuously remains on after operating for  
about 6 seconds when you turn the igni-  
tion switch to the ON position or started  
the engine, or if it comes on while driving,  
we recommend that the system be  
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.  
Seat belt warning and  
chime light  
The following warning and indicators are  
introduced in the previous pages.  
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt  
warning light will blink or illuminate for  
approximately 6 seconds each time you  
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of  
belt fastening.  
• Automatic transaxle/Double clutch trans-  
mission shift lever indicator  
• Manual transaxle shift indicator  
• Parking assist warning (LCD display)  
For more details, refer to the “Seat belt”  
in chapter 3.  
4 79  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 80  
Features of your vehicle  
With smart key system  
Immobilizer indicator  
Tailgate open warning light  
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle  
equipped with the smart key, the immobi-  
lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes  
off.  
This warning light illuminates when the  
tailgate is not closed securely.  
Without smart key system  
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if  
the engine start/stop button is in the  
ACC or ON position, the indicator will  
illuminate for approximately 30 sec-  
onds to indicate that you are able to  
start the engine. However, when the  
smart key is not in the vehicle, if the  
engine start/stop button is pressed, the  
indicator will blink for a few seconds to  
indicate that you are not be able to  
start the engine.  
This indicator illuminates when the  
immobilizer key is inserted and turned to  
the ON position to start the engine.  
Low fuel level warning  
At this time, you can start the engine.The  
indicator goes out after the engine is run-  
ning.  
If this indicator blinks when the ignition  
switch is in the ON position before start-  
ing the engine, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
This warning light indicates the fuel tank  
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you  
should add fuel as soon as possible.  
Driving with the fuel level warning light on  
or with the fuel level below “O/E” can  
cause the engine to misfire and damage  
the catalytic converter (if equipped).  
• If the indicator illuminates only for 2  
seconds and goes out when the  
engine start/stop button is turned to  
ON position with the smart key in the  
vehicle, we recommend that the sys-  
tem be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
• When the battery is weak, if the engine  
start/stop button is pressed, the indica-  
tor will blink and you are not able to  
start the engine. However, you are able  
to start the engine by pressing the  
engine start/stop button directly with  
the smart key. Also, if the smart key  
system related parts have a problem,  
the indicator will blink.  
4 80  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 81  
Features of your vehicle  
Electronic Power Steering  
(EPS) system warning light  
(if equipped)  
Turn signal indicator lights  
Light on indicator  
This indicator light comes on after the  
ignition key is turned to the ON position  
and then it will go off in approximately 3  
seconds if there is no problem with EPS.  
The indicator illuminates when the tail  
lights or headlights are ON.  
The blinking green arrows on the instru-  
ment panel show the direction indicated  
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on  
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly  
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,  
a malfunction in the turn signal system is  
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-  
ed for repairs.  
Low Beam Indicator Light  
(if equipped)  
This light also comes on when the EPS  
has some problems. If it comes on while  
driving, we recommend that the system  
be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
headlights are on.  
High beam indicator  
This indicator illuminates when the head-  
lights are on and in the high beam posi-  
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled  
into the Flash-to-Pass position.  
4 81  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 82  
Features of your vehicle  
Adaptive Front  
Lighting System (AFLS)  
Front fog light indicator  
(if equipped)  
Parking brake & brake  
fluid warning  
AFLS  
malfunction indicator  
(if equipped)  
Parking brake warning  
If the AFLS malfunction indicator illumi-  
nates, the AFLS is not working properly.  
Drive to the nearest safe location and  
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-  
uously remains on, we recommend that  
the system be checked by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
The indicator illuminates when the front  
fog lights are ON.  
This light illuminates when the parking  
brake is applied with the ignition switch in  
the START or ON position. The warning  
light should go off when the parking  
brake is released.  
Rear fog light indicator  
(if equipped)  
Low brake fluid level warning  
This indicator illuminates when the rear  
fog lights are ON.  
If the warning light remains on, it may  
indicate that the brake fluid level in the  
reservoir is low.  
If the warning light remains on:  
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
2. With the engine stopped, check the  
brake fluid level immediately and add  
fluid as required. Then check all brake  
components for fluid leaks.  
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are  
found, the warning light remains on or  
the brakes do not operate properly. We  
recommend that you contact an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
4 82  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 83  
Features of your vehicle  
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-  
nal braking systems. This means you still  
have braking on two wheels even if one  
of the dual systems should fail. With only  
one of the dual systems working, more  
than normal pedal travel and greater  
pedal pressure are required to stop the  
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short  
a distance with only a portion of the  
brake system working. If the brakes fail  
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear  
for additional engine braking and stop the  
car as soon as it is safe to do so.  
Electric Parking Brake  
(EPB) malfunction  
indicator (if equipped)  
Anti-lock brake system  
(ABS) warning light  
EPB  
The EPB malfunction indicator will illumi-  
nate when the ignition switch is turned  
ON, but should go off after approximate-  
ly 3 seconds. If the warning light does not  
come on, or continuously remains on we  
recommend that the system be checked  
by an authorized Kia dealer.  
This light illuminates if the ignition switch  
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-  
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-  
ing normally.  
If the ABS warning light remains on,  
comes on while driving, or does not  
come on when the ignition switch is  
turned to the ON position, this indicates  
that there may be a problem with the  
ABS.  
Also, the EPB malfunction indicator may  
illuminate when the ESC indicator comes  
on to indicate that the ESC is not working  
properly, but if this occurs, it does not  
indicate the EPB has malfunctioned.  
To check bulb operation, check whether  
the parking brake and brake fluid warning  
light illuminates when the ignition switch  
is in the ON position.  
If this occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer. The normal braking system will  
still be operational, but without the assis-  
tance of the anti-lock brake system.  
For more details, refer to "EPB" in chap-  
ter 5.  
WARNING  
Driving the vehicle with a warning  
light on is dangerous. If the brake  
warning light remains on, we recom-  
mend that the system be checked by  
an authorized Kia dealer.  
4 83  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 84  
Features of your vehicle  
Electronic brake  
force distribution  
(EBD) system  
Electronic Stability Control  
(ESC) indicator  
(if equipped)  
WARNING  
If both ABS and Brake warning  
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-  
cle’s brake system will not work  
normally. So you may experience  
an unexpected and dangerous situ-  
ation during sudden braking. In this  
case, avoid high speed driving and  
abrupt braking except an emer-  
gency situation.  
warning light  
If two warning lights illuminate at the  
same time while driving, your vehicle’s  
ABS and EBD system may have mal-  
functioned.  
In this case, your ABS and regular brake  
system may not work normally. We rec-  
ommend that the system be checked by  
an authorized Kia dealer.  
The ESC indicator will illuminate when  
the ignition switch is turned ON, but  
should go off after approximately 3 sec-  
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors  
the driving conditions. Under normal driv-  
ing conditions, the ESC indicator will  
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-  
tion condition is encountered, the ESC  
will operate, and the ESC indicator will  
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.  
We recommend that the system be  
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.  
✽
NOTICE  
But, if the ESC system malfunctions the  
indicator illuminates and stays on. We  
recommend that the system be checked  
by an authorized Kia dealer.  
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-  
ing light is on and stays on, the  
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter  
may not work. Also, the EPS warning  
light may illuminate and the steering  
effort may increase or decrease. In this  
case, we recommend that the system be  
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.  
ESC OFF indicator  
(if equipped)  
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate  
when the ignition switch is turned ON,  
but should go off after approximately 3  
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,  
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC  
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating  
the ESC is deactivated.  
4 84  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 85  
Features of your vehicle  
Auto stop indicator  
(if equipped)  
Cruise indicator (if equipped)  
Charging system warning  
light  
CRUISE indicator  
This warning light indicates a malfunction  
of either the generator or electrical  
charging system.  
This indicator will illuminate when the  
engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the  
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.  
The indicator illuminates when the cruise  
control system is enabled.  
If the warning light comes on while the  
vehicle is in motion:  
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.  
When the automatic starting occurrs, the  
auto stop indicator on the cluster will  
blink for 5 seconds.  
The cruise indicator in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the cruise  
control ON-OFF button  
ing wheel is pushed.  
on the steer-  
For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle  
Stop and Go) system in chapter 5.  
2. With the engine off, check the genera-  
tor drive belt for looseness or break-  
age.  
The indicator goes off when the cruise  
control ON-OFF button is pushed  
again. For more information about the  
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise  
control system” in chapter 5.  
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-  
lem exists somewhere in the electrical  
charging system. We recommend that  
the system be checked by an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
For vehicles equipped with instrument  
cluster type B, the indicator illuminates  
on the LCD display.  
✽
NOTICE  
Cruise SET indicator  
When the engine automatically starts by  
the ISG system, some warning lights  
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking  
brake warning light) may turn on for a  
few seconds.  
This happens because of low battery  
voltage. It does not mean the system is  
malfunctioning.  
SET  
The indicator illuminates when the cruise  
control switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.  
The cruise SET indicator in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminats when the cruise  
control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.  
The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-  
nate when the cruise control cancel but-  
ton O is pushed or the system is disen-  
gaged.  
4 85  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 86  
Features of your vehicle  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS) indicator (if equipped)  
Low tire pressure telltale/  
Engine oil pressure warn-  
ing  
WARNING - Safe stopping  
• The TPMS cannot alert you to  
severe and sudden tire damage  
caused by external factors.  
TPMS malfunction indicator  
This warning light indicates the engine oil  
pressure is low.  
• If you notice any vehicle instabili-  
ty, immediately take your foot off  
the accelerator pedal, apply the  
brakes gradually and with light  
force, and slowly move to a safe  
position off the road.  
If the warning light illuminates while driv-  
ing:  
The low tire pressure telltale comes on  
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is  
turned to the ON position.  
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and  
stop.  
The low tire pressure and position tell-  
tales illuminates when one or more of  
your tires is significantly underinflated.  
2. With the engine off, check the engine  
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as  
required.  
The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu-  
minate after it blinks for approximately  
one minute when there is a problem with  
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.  
If the warning light remains on after  
adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-  
ommend that you call an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
If this occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
CAUTION  
For more details, refer to the TPMS in  
chapter 6.  
If the engine does not stop immedi-  
ately after the engine oil pressure  
warning light is illuminated, severe  
damage could result.  
The low tire pressure position telltale illu-  
minates on the LCD display.  
4 86  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 87  
Features of your vehicle  
Engine oil level warning  
light (if equipped, for diesel)  
✽
NOTICE  
CAUTION  
• If you travel approximately 50  
km~100 km after the engine warms  
up, after adding the engine oil, the  
warning light will go off.  
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3  
times within 10 seconds, the warning  
light will go off immediately. However,  
when you turn off the warning light  
without adding the engine oil, the light  
will come on again after traveling  
approximately 50 km ~ 100 km after  
the engine warms up.  
If the oil pressure warning light  
stays on while the engine is run-  
ning, serious engine damage may  
result. The oil pressure warning  
light comes on whenever there is  
insufficient oil pressure. In normal  
operation, it should come on when  
the ignition switch is turned on,  
then go out when the engine is  
started. If the oil pressure warning  
light stays on while the engine is  
running, there is a serious malfunc-  
tion.  
The engine oil level warning light illumi-  
nates when the engine oil level should be  
checked.  
If the warning light comes on, check the  
engine oil level as soon as possible and  
add engine oil as required.  
Slowly pour the recommended oil little by  
little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :  
approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)  
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer  
to "Recommended lubricants and capac-  
ities" in chapter 8.)  
CAUTION  
If this happens, stop the car as soon  
as it is safe to do so, turn off the  
engine and check the oil level. If the  
oil level is low, fill the engine oil to  
the proper level and start the engine  
again. If the light stays on with the  
engine running, turn the engine off  
immediately. In any instance where  
the oil light stays on when the  
engine is running, we recommend  
that the system be checked by an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
If the light comes on continuously  
after adding the engine oil and trav-  
eling approximately 50 km~100 km  
after the engine warms up, we rec-  
ommend that the system be checked  
by an authorized Kia dealer.  
Do not overfill the engine oil to ensure  
the oil level is not above F mark on the  
dipstick.  
Even if this light doesn't come on  
after the engine has started, the  
engine oil should be checked and  
supplied periodically.  
4 87  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 88  
Features of your vehicle  
Malfunction indicator lamp  
(MIL) (check engine light)  
CAUTION  
Prolonged driving with the Emission  
Control System Malfunction  
Indicator Light illuminated may  
cause damage to the emission con-  
trol systems which could effect dri-  
vability and/or fuel economy.  
CAUTION - Diesel engine  
(if equipped with DPF)  
When the malfunction indicator  
light blinks, it may stop blinking  
after driving the vehicle at more  
than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more  
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000  
engine rpm for a certain time (for  
about 25 minutes).  
This indicator light is part of the Engine  
Control System which monitors various  
emission control system components. If  
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-  
cates that a potential problem has been  
detected somewhere in the emission  
control system.  
This light will also illuminate when the  
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-  
tion, and will go out in a few seconds  
after the engine is started. If it illuminates  
while driving, or does not illuminate when  
the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-  
tion, we recommend that the system be  
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.  
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be  
drivable, but we recommend that the sys-  
tem be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
If the malfunction indicator light  
continues to blink in spite of the  
procedure, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
CAUTION - Gasoline engine  
If the Emission Control System  
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-  
nates, potential catalytic converter  
damage is possible which could  
result in loss of engine power. We  
recommend that the system be  
inspected by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
If you continue to drive with the  
malfunction indicator light blinking  
for a long time, the DPF system can  
be damaged and fuel consumption  
can worsen.  
CAUTION - Diesel engine  
If the Emission Control System  
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,  
some error related to the injection  
quantity adjustment occurs which  
could result in loss of engine  
power, combustion noise and poor  
emission. We recommend that the  
system be inspected by an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
4 88  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 89  
Features of your vehicle  
Engine coolant tempera-  
ture warning light  
(if equipped)  
Glow indicator  
(Diesel engine)  
Fuel filter warning light  
(Diesel engine)  
The warning light illuminates if the tem-  
perature of the engine coolant is above  
120 3°C (248 5.4°F).  
The indicator light illuminates when the  
ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-  
tion. The engine can be started after the  
preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-  
minating time varies with the water tem-  
perature, air temperature and battery  
condition.  
This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-  
onds after the ignition switch is set to the  
ON position and then it will go out. If it  
lights up while the engine is running, it  
indicates that water has accumulated  
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,  
remove the water from the fuel filter.  
Do not continue driving with an overheat-  
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer  
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.  
For more details, refer to “Fuel filter” in  
chapter 7.  
✽
NOTICE  
✽
NOTICE  
If the engine coolant temperature warn-  
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-  
heating that may damage the engine.  
If the engine does not start within 10  
seconds after the preheating is complet-  
ed, turn the ignition key once more to  
the LOCK/OFF position for 10 seconds,  
and then to the ON position, in order to  
preheat again.  
CAUTION  
When the fuel filter warning light  
illuminates, engine power (vehicle  
speed & idle speed) may decrease.  
If you keep driving with the warning  
light on, you can damage your vehi-  
cle's engine parts and injection sys-  
tem of the Common Rail. If this  
occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
CAUTION  
If the preheat indicator light contin-  
ues to illuminate or flash on and off  
after the engine has warmed up or  
while driving, we recommend that  
the system be checked by an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
4 89  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 90  
Features of your vehicle  
LCD DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAY)  
To change the date, time or temperature  
unit(°C ↔ °F), press the SET (2) button  
for more than 1 seconds.  
Then you will enter the set-up mode and  
mode changes in the following order as  
you press the SET (2) button less than 1  
second.  
HOUR → MINUTE → YEAR → MONTH  
→ DAY → 12H/24H → TEMPERATURE  
UNIT CHANGE → Escape set-up mode  
OJD042142  
Press the SET (2) button less than 1 sec-  
ond to select the mode and set the data  
OJD042143  
using the UP (1, ) and DOWN (1,  
)
Door and tailgate open display  
button while the selected setting mode  
blinks.  
The monitor will display the correspon-  
ding door or tailgate that is not closed  
securely.  
To cancel the SET UP mode, do one of  
the following :  
- Press the SET button less than 1 sec-  
ond in set-up temperature unit change  
mode  
- Press the SET button more than 1 sec-  
ond in any set-up mode  
OJD042145  
Calendar / Clock / Outside ambi-  
ent Temperature (if equipped)  
- After 15 seconds without any key press  
- Ignition is On or OFF in Set-up mode  
- Battery is disconnected  
The monitor will display the outside ambi-  
ent temperature, date and time.  
4 90  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 91  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
If the icy road warning light appears  
while driving, you should drive more  
attentively and safely refraining from  
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-  
den braking or sharp turning, etc.  
OJD042144  
OJD042146  
TPMS (if equipped)  
Icy road warning light  
(if equipped)  
The monitor will display the correspon-  
ding tire that is low with pressure.  
This warning light is to warn the driver  
the road may be icy when:  
• Ignition ON  
For details, see Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System on chapter 6.  
• Temperature range: approximately below  
4°C (39.2°F).  
The warning light will blink for 10 sec-  
onds and then illuminate. Also, the warn-  
ing chime will sound.  
4 91  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 92  
Features of your vehicle  
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
The rear parking assist system assists  
■ 5 Door  
■ Wagon  
■ 3 Door  
the driver during backward movement of  
the vehicle by chiming if any object is  
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47  
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a  
supplemental system and it is not intend-  
ed to nor does it replace the need for  
extreme care and attention of the driver.  
The sensing range and objects  
detectable by the back sensors are limit-  
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much  
attention to what is behind you as you  
would in a vehicle without a rear parking  
assist system.  
Sensors  
OJD042084  
OJD042242  
OJD043243  
OJD042080  
Operation of the rear parking  
assist system  
WARNING  
Operating condition  
The rear parking assist system is a  
supplementary function only. The  
operation of the rear parking assist  
system can be affected by several  
factors (including environmental  
conditions). It is the responsibility  
of the driver to always check the  
area behind the vehicle before and  
while backing up.  
• This system will activate when the indi-  
cator on the rear parking assist OFF  
button is not illuminated.  
Sensors  
If you desire to deactivate the rear  
parking assist system, press the rear  
parking assist OFF button again. (The  
indicator on the button will illuminate.)  
To turn the system on, press the button  
again. (The indicator on the button will  
go off.)  
• This system will activate when backing  
up with the ignition switch ON.  
Sensors  
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over  
5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be  
activated correctly.  
4 92  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 93  
Features of your vehicle  
• The sensing distance while the rear  
parking assist system is in operation is  
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).  
Types of warning sound  
Type of the warning indicator  
(if equipped)  
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm (47  
in. to 23.6 in.) from the rear bumper:  
Buzzer beeps intermittently  
Distance from  
object  
• When more than two objects are  
sensed at the same time, the closest  
one will be recognized first.  
Warning indicator  
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm  
(23.6 in. to 12.2 in.) from the rear  
bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequent-  
ly  
1
*
61cm ~ 120 cm  
(24 in. ~ 47 in.)  
• When an object is within 30 cm (11.8  
in.) of the rear bumper:  
Buzzer sounds continuously.  
1
*
31cm ~ 60 cm  
(12.2 in. ~ 23.6 in.)  
1
*
Less than 30 cm  
(11.8 in.)  
*1: It indicates the range of sensed object  
by each sensor. (Left, Center, Right)  
❈ In case the object is between or close  
to the sensors, the indicator could be  
different.  
4 93  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 94  
Features of your vehicle  
The detecting range may decrease  
when:  
Non-operational conditions of  
rear parking assist system  
Rear parking assist system pre-  
cautions  
1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-  
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-  
ing range will return to normal when  
removed.)  
The rear parking assist system may  
not operate properly when:  
• The rear parking assist system may  
not sound sequentially depending on  
the speed and shapes of the objects  
detected.  
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will  
operate normally when the moisture  
has been cleared.)  
2. Outside air temperature is extremely  
hot or cold.  
• The rear parking assist system may  
malfunction if the vehicle bumper  
height or sensor installation has been  
modified or damaged. Any non-factory  
installed equipment or accessories  
may also interfere with the sensor per-  
formance.  
2. The sensor is covered with foreign  
matter, such as snow or water, or the  
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate  
normally when the material is removed  
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)  
The following objects may not be rec-  
ognized by the sensor:  
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,  
chains or small poles.  
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces  
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-  
ent).  
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-  
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy  
material or snow.  
• The sensor may not recognize objects  
less than 30 cm (11.8 in.) from the sen-  
sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-  
tance. Use caution.  
4. Objects generating excessive noise  
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle  
engines, or truck air brakes) are within  
range of the sensor.  
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m  
(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)  
in diameter.  
• When the sensor is frozen or stained  
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor  
may be inoperative until the stains are  
removed using a soft cloth.  
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.  
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile  
phones are within range of the sensor.  
7. Trailer towing.  
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-  
sor. Sensor damage could occur.  
4 94  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:26 PM Page 95  
Features of your vehicle  
Self-diagnosis  
✽
NOTICE  
This system can only sense objects with-  
in the range and location of the sensors;  
it can not detect objects in other areas  
where sensors are not installed. Also,  
small or slim objects, such as poles or  
objects located between sensors may not  
be detected by the sensors.  
When you shift the gear to the R  
(Reverse) position and if one or more of  
the below occurs you may have a mal-  
function in the rear parking assist sys-  
tem.  
• You don't hear an audible warning  
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-  
tently.  
Always visually check behind the vehi-  
cle when backing up.  
Be sure to inform any drivers of the  
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the  
system regarding the systems capabili-  
ties and limitations.  
•
is displayed. (if equipped)  
(blinks)  
If this occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
WARNING  
Pay close attention when the vehi-  
cle is driven close to objects on the  
road, particularly pedestrians, and  
especially children. Be aware that  
some objects may not be detected  
by the sensors, due to the object’s  
distance, size or material, all of  
which can limit the effectiveness of  
the sensor. Always perform a visual  
inspection to make sure the vehicle  
is clear of all obstructions before  
moving the vehicle in any direction.  
WARNING  
Your new vehicle warranty does not  
cover any accidents or damage to  
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-  
pants due to a rear parking assist  
system malfunction. Always drive  
safely and cautiously.  
4 95  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 96  
Features of your vehicle  
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
■ Front  
The parking assist system assists the  
driver during movement of the vehicle by  
chiming or displaying the area an obsta-  
cle is detected on the instrument cluster  
if any object is sensed within the distance  
of 100 cm (39.4 in.) in front and 120 cm  
(47 in.) behind the vehicle.  
Sensors  
■ Rear (3 Door)  
This system is a supplemental system  
and it is not intended to nor does it  
replace the need for extreme care and  
attention of the driver.  
OJD042085  
The sensing range and objects  
detectable by the sensors are limited.  
OJD042081  
Whenever moving pay as much attention  
to what is in front and behind of you as  
you would in a vehicle without a parking  
assist system.  
Operation of the parking assist  
system  
Sensors  
OJD043243  
Operating condition  
■ Rear (5 Door)  
• This system activates when the park-  
ing assist system button is pressed  
with the ignition switch ON.  
WARNING  
Type A  
The parking assist system should  
only be considered as a supple-  
mentary function. The driver must  
check the front and rear view. The  
operational function of the parking  
assist system can be affected by  
many factors and conditions of the  
surroundings, so the responsibility  
rests always with the driver.  
The indicator of the parking assist sys-  
tem button turns on automatically and  
activates the parking assist system  
when you shift the gear to the  
R(Reverse) position or press the SPAS  
button. It will turn off automatically  
when you drive above 40 km/h(24.8  
mph) except in the case when the  
parking assist system button is  
pressed with the ignition switch ON.  
Sensors  
OJD042084  
■ Rear (Wagon)  
Sensors  
OJD042242  
4 96  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 97  
Features of your vehicle  
Type B  
Type of warning indicator and sound  
: with Warning sound  
The indicator of the parking assist sys-  
tem button turns on automatically and  
activates the parking assist system  
when you shift the gear to the  
R(Reverse) position or press the SPAS  
button. It will turn off automatically when  
you drive above 40 km/h(24.8 mph).  
Warning indicator  
Distance from object  
Warning sound  
When driving  
forward  
When driving  
rearward  
Buzzer beeps  
intermittently  
100cm~61cm  
120cm~61cm  
Front  
Rear  
Front  
Rear  
Front  
Rear  
-
• If the vehicle speed is above 10km/h  
(6.2 mph), the parking assist system  
will not operate.  
Buzzer beeps  
intermittently  
-
-
-
• The sensing distance while moving for-  
ward is approximately 100 cm (39.4 in.)  
when you are driving less than 10 km/h  
(6.2 mph).  
Buzzer beeps  
frequently  
60cm~31cm  
• When more than two objects are  
sensed at the same time, the closest  
one will be recognized first.  
Buzzer beeps  
frequently  
Buzzer sounds  
continuously  
✽
NOTICE  
30cm  
Buzzer sounds  
continuously  
It may not operate if it’s distance from  
the object is already less than approxi-  
mately 25 cm when the system is ON.  
✽
NOTICE  
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration accord-  
ing to objects or sensor status.  
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.  
4 97  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 98  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
There is a possibility of parking  
assist system malfunction when:  
Non-operational conditions of  
parking assist system  
• This system can only sense  
objects within the range and loca-  
tion of the sensors;  
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such  
as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or  
gradient.  
Parking assist system may not oper-  
ate normally when:  
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will  
operate normally when moisture  
melts.)  
It can not detect objects in other  
areas where sensors are not  
installed. Also, small or slim  
objects, such as poles or objects  
located between sensors may not  
be detected by the sensors.  
2. Objects generating excessive noise  
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle  
engines, or truck air brakes can inter-  
fere with the sensor.  
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,  
such as snow or water, or the sensor  
cover is blocked. (It will operate nor-  
mally when the material is removed or  
the sensor is no longer blocked.)  
3. Heavy rain or water spray.  
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile  
phones present near the sensor.  
5. Sensor is covered with snow.  
Always visually check behind the  
vehicle when backing up.  
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter  
such as snow or water. (Sensing range  
will return to normal when removed.)  
• Be sure to inform any drivers of  
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar  
with the system regarding the  
systems capabilities and limita-  
tions.  
Detecting range may decrease when:  
1. Outside air temperature is extremely  
hot or cold.  
4.The parking assist button is off.  
2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m  
and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.  
The following objects may not be rec-  
ognized by the sensor:  
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,  
chains or small poles.  
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor  
frequency such as clothes, spongy  
material or snow.  
4 98  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 99  
Features of your vehicle  
Self-diagnosis  
✽
✽
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
1. The warning may not sound sequen- This system can only sense objects with-  
tially depending on the speed and in the range and location of the sensors,  
When you shift the gear to the R  
(Reverse) position and if one or more of  
the below occurs you may have a mal-  
function in the parking assist system.  
shapes of the objects detected.  
it can not detect objects in other areas  
2. The parking assist system may mal- where sensors are not installed. Also,  
function if the vehicle bumper height small or slim objects, or objects located  
or sensor installation has been modi- between sensors may not be detected.  
fied. Any non-factory installed equip- Always visually check in front and  
ment or accessories may also interfere behind the vehicle when driving.  
• You don't hear an audible warning  
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-  
tently.  
with the sensor performance.  
Be sure to inform any drivers in the  
•
is displayed. (if equipped)  
3. Sensor may not recognize objects less vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the  
than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may system regarding the systems capabili-  
sense an incorrect distance. Use with ties and limitations.  
caution.  
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained  
with snow or water, the sensor may be  
inoperative until the stains are  
removed using a soft cloth.  
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-  
sor with any hard objects that could  
(blinks)  
If this occurs, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
WARNING  
Pay close attention when the vehi-  
cle is driven close to objects on the  
road, particularly pedestrians, and  
especially children. Be aware that  
some objects may not be detected  
by the sensors, due to the objects  
distance, size or material, all of  
which can limit the effectiveness of  
the sensor. Always perform a visual  
inspection to make sure the vehicle  
is clear of all obstructions before  
moving the vehicle in any direction.  
WARNING  
Your new vehicle warranty does not  
cover any accidents or damage to  
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-  
pants related to a parking assist  
system. Always drive safely and  
cautiously.  
damage the surface of the sensor.  
Sensor damage could occur.  
4 99  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 100  
Features of your vehicle  
SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (SPAS) (IF EQUIPPED)  
✽
NOTICE  
WARNING  
• The vehicle will not stop for pedestri-  
ans or objects that may be in its path,  
so the driver must monitor the  
maneuver.  
• Use the system only in parking lots  
and places used for parking.  
• The system does not work if there is  
no car parked in front of the parking  
space you are planning to park or if it  
is a diagonal parking space.  
• After parking your vehicle using the  
system, the vehicle may not be parked  
• The Smart Parking Assist System  
should only be considered as a  
supplementary function. The driv-  
er must check the front and rear  
view for objects. The operational  
function of the Smart Parking  
Assist System can be affected by  
many factors and conditions of the  
surroundings, so the responsibili-  
ty rests always with the driver.  
OLM041270  
• The system may not operate nor-  
mally if the vehicle needs wheel  
alignment adjustment. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
at the exact spot you have wished. For  
example, the space between your vehi-  
cle and wall may not be the distance  
you have desired.  
The Smart Parking Assist System helps  
drivers park their vehicle by using sen-  
sors to measure parallel parking spaces,  
control the steering wheel to semi-auto-  
matically park the car and provide  
instruction on the LCD display to help  
through parking.  
• Deactivate the system and park your  
vehicle manually, when the situation  
requires parking manually.  
• If you use a different tire or wheel  
size rather than the size recom-  
mended by the Kia dealer, the sys-  
tem may not work properly. Always  
use the same size tire and wheel.  
• The Parking Assist System's front and  
rear warning sound activates when  
the Smart Parking Assist System is  
activated.  
• After searching for a parking space is  
completed, the Smart Parking Assist  
System will be canceled if the Parking  
Assist System is cancelled by pressing  
the button to the OFF position.  
• If you use additional frame on  
license plate then SPAS may gen-  
erate abnormal warning sound.  
4 100  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 101  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Right side  
- parallel mode  
■ Left side  
-parallel mode  
• Heavy wind  
• Wheel changed to an unauthorized  
size  
Non-operating condition  
Never use the Smart Parking Assist  
System in the below conditions.  
• Curved parking space  
• A problem with the wheel alignment  
• Next to a garden or bush  
• Inclined roads  
• A accessory installed on the detective  
area the of sensors (such as number  
plate holder)  
• A vehicle loaded with longer or wider  
cargo compared to the vehicle  
• Diagonal parking space  
• Vehicle leaned severely to one side  
• Strong sunlight or very cold weather  
• Parking space with trash, grass or bar-  
riers  
• Ultrasonic interference other vehicle's.  
Such as horn sounds of other vehicles,  
motorcycle's engine noise, air brake  
noise of heavy vehicles and with the  
other vehicle's parking assist system  
working.  
• Heavy snow or rain  
• A pole close to the parking line  
• Bumpy roads  
OLM041271  
Operating condition  
• A vehicle equipped with a snow chain  
or spare tire  
The system will help park the vehicle in  
the middle or back of a parked vehicle.  
Use the system when all the below con-  
ditions are met.  
• Tire pressure lower or higher than the  
standard tire pressure  
• A trailer connected to the vehicle  
• Slippery or uneven road  
• When the parking space is a straight  
line  
• Big vehicles such as buses or trucks  
parked  
• When parallel parking is required  
• When there is a parked vehicle  
• Sensor covered with foreign matter,  
such as snow or water  
• When there is enough space to move  
the vehicle  
• Moisture frozen on the sensor.  
• A motorcycle or bicycle parked  
• A trash can or obstacle near  
4 101  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 102  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
2. Parking in snow  
(Continued)  
3. Parking in narrow space  
Do not use the Smart Parking  
Assist System in the following con-  
ditions for unexpected results may  
occur and cause a serious accident.  
1. Parking on inclines  
OJD042157  
OJD042158  
Snow may interfere with sensor  
operation or the system may cancel  
if the road is slippery while parking.  
Also, if the driver is unfamiliar with  
applying the accelerator and brake  
pedal, a car accident may occur.  
The system may not search for  
parking spaces if the space is too  
narrow. Even if it operates always  
be careful.  
OJD042156  
(Continued)  
The driver must apply the accelera-  
tor and brake pedal when parking  
on inclines. If the driver is unfamil-  
iar with applying the accelerator  
and brake pedal, a car accident may  
occur.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
4 102  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 103  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
4. Parking diagonal  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
6. Parking behind a truck  
5. Parking in uneven road  
OJD042160  
OJD042159  
OSL040145  
The system is a supplemental for  
parallel parking. Diagonal line park-  
ing is not available. Even if the vehi-  
cle is able to enter the space, do  
not operate the Smart Parking  
Assist System. The system will  
attempt parallel parking.  
An accident may occur when park-  
ing behind a vehicle higher than  
yours. For example, bus, truck, etc.  
Parking in uneven roads, the driver  
needs to properly apply the pedal  
(clutch, accelerator or brake). If not,  
the system may cancel when the  
vehicle slips or an accident may  
occur.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
4 103  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 104  
Features of your vehicle  
How the system works  
(Continued)  
7. Obstacle in parking space  
1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist  
System  
2. Select parking assist mode  
3. Search for parking space (slowly move  
forward.)  
4. Search complete (automatic search by  
sensor.)  
5. Steering wheel control  
(1) Shift according to the instruction on  
the LCD display.  
(2) Drive slowly with the brake pedal  
applied.  
OJD042082  
OLM041272  
1. Activate Smart Parking Assist  
System  
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-  
plete  
The system may search for a park-  
ing space even though an obstacle  
is in the parking space. An accident  
may occur if you continue to park  
the vehicle with the system.  
• Press the Smart Parking Assist  
System button (the button indicator will  
illuminate).  
7. If necessary, manually adjust position  
of vehicle.  
• The Parking Assist System will be acti-  
vated (the button indicator will illumi-  
nate).  
✽
NOTICE  
• Before activating the system check if  
the conditions are possible to use the  
system.  
Do not solely rely on the Smart  
Parking Assist System.  
A warning sound will be heard if an  
obstacle is detected.  
• For your safety, always apply the  
brake pedal except for when driving.  
• Press the Smart Parking Assist  
System button again for more than 2  
seconds to turn off the system.  
• The Smart Parking Assist System  
defaults to the OFF position whenever  
the ignition switch is turned on.  
4 104  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 105  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Right side  
- parallel mode  
■ Left side  
-parallel mode  
■ Right side  
- parallel mode  
■ Left side  
-parallel mode  
✽
NOTICE  
• Turn on the hazard warning flasher if  
it is crowded with other vehicles.  
• If the parking lot is small, slowly drive  
more nearer to the parking space.  
• The search for a parking space will be  
completed only when there is enough  
space for the vehicle to move to park.  
✽
NOTICE  
• When searching for a parking space,  
the system may not be able to find a  
parking space if there is no vehicle  
parked, a parking space is available  
after driving by or a parking space is  
available before driving by.  
• The system may not operate normally  
in the following conditions:  
(1) When the sensors are frozen  
(2) When the sensors are dirty  
OJD042219/OJD042216  
OJD042220/OJD042217  
2. Select parking assist mode  
3. Search for parking space  
• Select the parking assist mode by  
pressing the Smart Parking Assist  
System button with the shift lever in N  
(Neutral) or D(Drive) and the brake  
pedal depressed.  
• Slowly drive forward maintaining the  
distance of approximately 50cm ~  
150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the  
parked vehicles. The side sensors will  
search for a parking space.  
• The right side parallel mode is select-  
ed automatically when the Smart  
Parking Assist System is activated.  
• If the vehicle speed is over 30km/h  
(18.6mph), a message will appear to  
notify to reduce speed.  
(3) When it snows or rains heavily  
(4) When a pillar or object is near  
• To select the left side parallel mode  
press the Smart Parking Assist System  
button once more.  
• If the vehicle speed is over 40km/h  
(24.8mph), the system will cancel.  
• If the button is pressed again, the sys-  
tem will turn off.  
4 105  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:27 PM Page 106  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Right side  
- parallel mode  
■ Left side  
-parallel mode  
50~150 cm  
OLM041273  
OJD042221/OJD042218  
OJD042222  
4. Search complete  
5. Steering wheel control  
✽
NOTICE  
While driving forward to search for a  
parking space, the above message will  
appear with a beep sound if the search is  
complete. Stop the vehicle and shift to  
the R (Reverse) position.  
• The above message will appear if the  
shift lever is in R (Reverse).The steering  
wheel will be controlled automatically.  
Slowly drive forward maintaining the  
distance of approximately 50cm ~  
150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the parked  
vehicles. If not within the distance, the  
system may not be able to search for a  
parking space.  
• The system will be cancelled if you  
firmly hold the steering wheel while it is  
controlled automatically.  
• The system will be cancelled if vehicle  
speed is over 7km/h(4.3mph).  
CAUTION  
• Always drive slowly with the  
brake pedal applied.  
CAUTION  
After searching for a parking space  
is completed, continue using the  
system after checking the sur-  
rounding area.  
• If the parking space is to small  
the system may be cancelled at  
the Steering wheel control stage.  
Do not park your vehicle if the  
space is too small.  
WARNING  
Do not put your hands between the  
steering wheel while it is being  
automatically controlled.  
4 106  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 107  
Features of your vehicle  
To cancel the system while parking  
■ Manual transaxle  
CAUTION  
• Always drive slowly with the  
brake pedal applied.  
Press the Smart Parking Assist System  
button or turn the steering wheel to the  
left or right.  
• Always check for objects around  
your vehicle before driving.  
• If the vehicle does not move even  
though the brake pedal is not  
depressed, check the surround-  
ing before depressing the accel-  
erator pedal. Be sure not to speed  
over 7km/h(4.3mph).  
■ Automatic transaxle  
✽
NOTICE  
• If you do not follow the instructions pro-  
vided, you may fail to park your vehicle.  
However, if the Parking Assist System  
warning sound (distance from object  
is within 30cm: continuous beep)  
occurs, slowly drive the vehicle to the  
reverse direction of the detected  
object after checking the surrounding.  
• Always check the surrounding before  
driving your vehicle if the Parking  
Assist System warning sound (dis-  
tance from object is within 30cm: con-  
tinuous beep) is heard for the object is  
close to your vehicle.  
OJD042224/OJD042225/OJD042223/OJD042225  
Gear shift while steering wheel control  
When the above message appears with a  
beep sound, shift the gear and drive the  
vehicle with the brake pedal depressed.  
4 107  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 108  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
The system may be cancelled in the below  
conditions:  
Always check the surrounding  
before releasing the brake pedal.  
• Ignoring the gear shift message and  
drive the vehicle approximately 150cm  
(59in).  
• The front and rear Parking Assist  
System warning sound (distance from  
object is within 30cm: continuous  
beep) is heard at the same time.  
WARNING  
Always be careful while parking for  
other vehicles or pedestrians.  
• 6 minutes have passed since the vehi-  
cle has been controlled by the Smart  
Parking Assist System.  
OJD042226  
• The shift lever is changed to the P  
(Park) or R (Reverse) position while  
searching for parking space.  
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-  
pleted  
Complete parking your vehicle according  
to the instructions on the LCD display. If  
required, manually control the steering  
wheel and complete parking your vehicle.  
✽
NOTICE  
The brake pedal must be depressed by  
the driver while parking your vehicle.  
4 108  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 109  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
• In the below conditions the system  
will be cancelled. Park your vehicle  
manually.  
1. Search for parking space  
- When the ABS/ESC is activated  
- When the vehicle speed is over  
40km/h (24.8mph)  
- When you press the Smart Parking  
Assist System button (the front and  
rear Parking Assist System operates)  
- When you shift the shift lever to R  
(Reverse)  
OJD042227/OJD042229  
OJD042228  
2. Steering wheel control  
Additional instructions(messages)  
System malfunction  
- When the ABS/ESC is activated  
- When the vehicle speed is over  
7km/h (4.3 mph)  
- When you press the Smart Parking  
Assist System button (the front and  
rear Parking Assist System operates)  
- When you shift the shift lever to D  
(Drive) before entering the parking  
space  
When the Smart Parking Assist System  
is operating, a message may appear  
regardless of the parking order.  
• If there is a problem with the system,  
when the system is turned on, the  
above message will appear. Also, the  
indicator on the button will not light up  
and a beep sound will be heard 3  
times.  
The messages will appear according to  
the circumstances. Follow the instruc-  
tions provided while parking your vehicle  
with the Smart Parking Assist System.  
• If there is a problem with only the  
Smart Parking Assist System, the  
Parking Assist System will operate  
after 2 seconds.  
- When you hold the steering wheel  
firmly  
If you notice any problem, have your  
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia  
dealer as soon as possible.  
4 109  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 110  
Features of your vehicle  
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)  
The rearview camera will activate when  
the back-up light is ON with the ignition  
switch ON and the shift lever in the R  
(Reverse) position.  
This system is a supplemental system  
that shows behind the vehicle through  
the navigation monitor while backing-up.  
WARNING  
• This system is a supplementary  
function only. It is the responsibil-  
ity of the driver to always check  
the inside/outside rearview mirror  
and the area behind the vehicle  
before and while backing up  
because there is a dead zone that  
can't see through the camera.  
OJD042086  
OJD042089  
Rear view display  
The hazard warning flasher should be  
used whenever you find it necessary to  
stop the vehicle in a hazardous location.  
When you must make such an emer-  
gency stop, always pull off the road as far  
as possible.  
• Always keep the camera lens  
clean. If lens is covered with for-  
eign matter, the camera may not  
operate normally.  
The hazard warning lights are turned on  
by pushing in the hazard switch. Both  
turn signal lights will blink. The hazard  
warning lights will operate even though  
the key is not in the ignition switch.  
OJD042088  
❈ The actual rear view in the vehicle may dif-  
fer from the illustration.  
❈ For more detailed informations, refer  
to supplement for navigation system.  
To turn the hazard warning lights off,  
push the switch again.  
4 110  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 111  
Features of your vehicle  
LIGHTING  
Battery saver function  
Headlamp delay function  
(if equipped)  
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome  
function (if equipped)  
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-  
vent the battery from being dis-  
charged. The system automatically  
turns off the parking lights when the  
driver removes the ignition key (Smart  
key : turns off the engine) and opens  
the driver- side door.  
The headlamps (and/or taillights) remain  
on for same minutes (Type A: 20 minutes,  
Type B: 5 minutes) after the ignition key  
is removed or turned to the ACC or  
LOCK position. However, if the driver’s  
door is opened and closed, the head-  
lights are turned off after 15 seconds.  
When the headlight switch is in the ON or  
AUTO position and all doors (and tail-  
gate) are closed and locked, if you press  
the door unlock button on the transmitter  
or smart key, the headlights will come on  
for about 15 seconds.  
• With this feature, the parking lights will  
be turned off automatically if the driver  
parks on the side of road at night.  
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO  
position, the function can only operate at  
night.  
The headlights can be turned off by  
pressing the lock button on the transmit-  
ter or smart key twice or turning off the  
light switch from the headlight or Auto  
light position.  
If necessary, to keep the lights on  
when the ignition key is removed, per-  
form the following :  
At this time, if you press the door unlock  
button again or door lock button on the  
transmitter or smart key, the headlights  
will turn off immediately.  
You can activate or deactivate the head-  
lamp delay fuction. Refer to “User setting”  
in this chapter.  
1) Open the driver-side door.  
You can activate or deactivate the head-  
lamp welcome fuction. Refer to “User set-  
ting” in this chapter.  
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON  
again using the light switch on the  
steering column.  
CAUTION  
✽
NOTICE  
If the driver gets out of the vehicle  
through other doors (except driver’s  
door), the battery saver function  
does not operate and the headlamp  
delay function does not turn off  
automatically. Therefore, it causes  
the battery to be discharged. In this  
case, make sure to turn off the lamp  
before getting out of the vehicle.  
There can be turned on front fog light  
and the fail light when you turn on the  
headlight switch ON. In this case we rec-  
ommend that you the system checked by  
an authorized Kia dealer.  
4 111  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 112  
Features of your vehicle  
Static bending light (if equipped)  
While driving the corner, for your sight  
and safety, the static bending light turns  
on automatically. The system will operate  
automatically as follows:  
• When vehicle speed is under 10km/h  
and steering wheel angle approximate-  
ly 80 degrees.  
• When vehicle speed is over 10km/h  
and steering wheel angle approximate-  
ly 35 degrees.  
• When the vehicle is at a standstill.  
OED040045  
OED040046  
• When moving rearwards with one of  
the above conditions satisfied the lights  
will light up the opposite direction.  
Lighting control  
Position light position (  
)
The light switch has a Headlight and a  
Parking light position.  
When the light switch is in the position  
light position, the tail, position, license  
and instrument panel lights are ON.  
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the  
end of the control lever to one of the fol-  
lowing positions:  
(1) OFF position  
(2) Position light position  
(3) Headlight position  
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)  
4 112  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 113  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
• Never place anything over the  
sensor (1) located on the instru-  
ment panel, this will ensure better  
auto-light system control.  
• Do not clean the sensor using a  
window cleaner, the cleaner may  
leave a light film which could  
interfere with sensor operation.  
• If your vehicle has window tint or  
other types of coating on the  
front windshield, the Auto light  
system may not work properly.  
OED040800  
OYN049201  
Auto light/AFLS position  
(if equipped)  
Headlight position (  
)
When the light switch is in the headlight  
position the head, tail, position, license  
and instrument panel lights are ON.  
When the light switch is in the AUTO light  
position, the taillights and headlights will  
be turned ON or OFF automatically  
depending on the amount of light outside  
the vehicle.  
✽
NOTICE  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position to turn on the headlights.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the adap-  
tive front lighting system (AFLS), it will  
also operate when the headlamp is ON.  
4 113  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 114  
Features of your vehicle  
• The high-beam indicator will light when  
the headlight high beams are switched  
on.  
• To prevent the battery from being dis-  
charged, do not leave the lights on for  
a prolonged time while the engine is  
not running.  
WARNING  
Do not use high beam when there  
are other vehicles. Using high  
beam could obstruct the other dri-  
ver's vision.  
OED040802  
OED040801  
Flashing headlights  
High - beam operation  
Pull the lever towards you. It will return to  
the normal position when released. The  
headlight switch does not need to be on  
to use this flashing feature.  
1. Turn the light switch to the headlight  
position.  
2. Push the lever away from you.  
4 114  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 115  
Features of your vehicle  
If an indicator stays on and does not  
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the  
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and  
will require replacement.  
One-touch lane change function  
(if equipped)  
To activate an one-touch lane change  
function, move the turn signal lever  
slightly and then release it. The lane  
change signals will blink 3 times.  
You can inactivate one-touch lane  
change function in “Auto triple turn” of  
“User setting”. Refer to “User setting” in  
chapter 4.  
✽
NOTICE  
OED040804  
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick  
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have  
a poor electrical connection in the cir-  
cuit.  
Turn signals and lane change sig-  
nals  
The ignition switch must be on for the  
turn signals to function. To turn on the  
turn signals, move the lever up or down  
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-  
ment panel indicate which turn signal is  
operating.  
They will self-cancel after a turn is com-  
pleted. If the indicator continues to flash  
after a turn, manually return the lever to  
the OFF position.  
To signal a lane change, move the turn  
signal lever slightly and hold it in position  
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-  
tion when released.  
4 115  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 116  
Features of your vehicle  
Daytime running light  
(if equipped)  
■ Type A  
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make  
it easier for others to see the front of your  
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-  
ful in many different driving conditions,  
and it is especially helpful after dawn and  
before sunset.  
OED040806  
The DRL system will turn off when:  
Type A  
■ Type B  
• When headlight (Low beam) switch is  
ON, DRL-LED system will be illuminat-  
ing with lower intensity  
OYN049200  
Front fog light (if equipped)  
• The front fog light switch is ON.  
• The engine is OFF.  
Fog lights are used to provide improved  
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,  
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn  
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned  
on after the position light is turned on.  
OAM049046L  
Type B  
Rear fog light  
• The headlight (low beam) switch is ON.  
• The front fog light switch is ON.  
• The engine is OFF.  
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the  
rear fog light switch (1) to the on position  
when the headlight is turned on.  
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light  
switch (1) to the O (Off) position.  
Also, the rear fog lights turn on when the  
rear fog light switch is turned on after the  
front fog light switch (if equipped) is  
turned on and the headlight switch is in  
the position light position.  
CAUTION  
When in operation, the fog lights  
consume large amounts of vehicle  
electrical power. Only use the fog  
lights when visibility is poor.  
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear  
fog light switch to the on position again.  
Rear fog light is located only on the dri-  
ver’s side (for wagon).  
4 116  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 117  
Features of your vehicle  
The higher the number of the switch is  
positioned, the lower the headlight beam  
level. Always keep the headlight beam at  
the proper leveling position, or headlights  
may dazzle other road users.  
Automatic type  
It automatically adjusts the headlight  
beam level according to the number of  
passengers and loading weight in the  
luggage area.  
Listed below are the examples of proper  
switch settings. For loading conditions  
other than those listed below, adjust the  
switch position so that the beam level  
may be the nearest as the condition  
obtained according to the list.  
And it offers proper headlight beam  
under various conditions.  
WARNING  
If it does not work properly even  
though your car is inclined back-  
ward according to passenger's  
posture, or the headlight beam is  
irradiated to the high or low posi-  
tion, we recommend that the sys-  
tem be inspected by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
Loading condition  
Driver only  
Switch position  
OJD042049  
0
0
Headlight leveling device  
(if equipped)  
Driver + Front passenger  
Full passengers  
(including driver)  
Manual type  
1
2
3
To adjust the headlight beam level  
according to the number of the passen-  
gers and the loading weight in the lug-  
gage area, turn the beam leveling switch.  
Full passengers (including  
driver) + Maximum permis-  
sible loading  
Do not attempt to inspect or  
replace the wiring yourself.  
Driver + Maximum permis-  
sible loading  
4 117  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 118  
Features of your vehicle  
OYN049201  
OJD042090  
If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes  
on, the AFLS is not working properly.  
Drive to the nearest safe location and  
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-  
uously remains on, we recommend that  
the system be checked by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
Adaptive Front Lighting System  
(AFLS) (if equipped)  
Adaptive front lighting system uses the  
steering angle and vehicle speed, to  
keep your field of vision wide by swiveling  
and leveling the headlamp.  
Change the switch to the AUTO position  
when the engine is running.The adaptive  
front lighting system will operate when  
the headlamp is ON. To turn off the  
AFLS, change the switch to other posi-  
tions. After turning the AFLS off, head-  
lamp swiveling no longer occurs, but lev-  
eling operates continuously.  
4 118  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:28 PM Page 119  
Features of your vehicle  
WIPERS AND WASHERS  
A : Wiper speed control (front)  
· 2 – High wiper speed  
· 1 – Low wiper speed  
· --- – Intermittent wipe  
· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe  
· O – Off  
Windshield wipers (front)  
■ Front  
Operates as follows when the ignition  
switch is turned ON.  
: For a single wiping cycle, move the  
lever to this position and release it.  
The wipers will operate continuously if  
the lever is held in this position.  
·
– Single wipe  
O : Wiper is not in operation  
--- : Wiper operates intermittently at the  
same wiping intervals. Use this mode  
in light rain or mist.To vary the speed  
setting, turn the speed control knob.  
B : Intermittent control wipe time  
adjustment  
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*  
D : Rear wiper/washer control*  
1 : Normal wiper speed  
2 : Fast wiper speed  
■ Rear  
·
– Continuous wipe  
✽
NOTICE  
· --- – Intermittent wipe  
· O – Off  
If there is heavy accumulation of snow  
or ice on the windshield, defrost the  
windshield for about 10 minutes, or  
until the snow and/or ice is removed  
before using the windshield wipers to  
ensure proper operation. If you do not  
remove the snow and/or ice before using  
the wiper and wash-er, it may damage  
the Wiper and washer system.  
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*  
* : if equipped  
OXM049230L/OAM049048L  
4 119  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 120  
Features of your vehicle  
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed  
control knob (1).  
CAUTION  
When washing the vehicle, set the  
wiper switch in the off position to  
stop the auto wiper operation.  
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode  
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper  
will operate once to perform a self-check  
of the system. Set the wiper to off posi-  
tion when the wiper is not in use.  
The wiper may operate and be dam-  
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO  
mode while washing the vehicle.  
Do not remove the sensor cover  
located on the upper end of the pas-  
senger side windshield glass.  
Damage to system parts could  
occur and may not be covered by  
your vehicle warranty.  
CAUTION  
When the ignition switch is ON and  
the windshield wiper switch is  
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-  
tion in the following situations to  
avoid any injury to the hands or  
other parts of the body:  
Rain sensor  
OEL049900  
AUTO (Automatic) control  
(if equipped)  
When starting the vehicle in winter,  
set the wiper switch in the off posi-  
tion. Otherwise, wipers may operate  
and ice may damage the windshield  
wiper blades. Always remove all  
snow and ice and defrost the wind-  
shield properly prior to operating  
the windshield wipers.  
The rain sensor located on the upper end  
of the windshield glass senses the  
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping  
cycle for the proper interval. The more it  
rains, the faster the wiper operates. When  
the rain stops, the wiper stops.  
• Do not touch the upper end of the  
windshield glass facing the rain  
sensor.  
• Do not wipe the upper end of the  
windshield glass with a damp or  
wet cloth.  
• Do not put pressure on the wind-  
shield glass.  
4 120  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 121  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
To prevent possible damage to the  
washer pump, do not operate the  
washer when the fluid reservoir is  
empty.  
• To prevent possible damage to  
the wipers or windshield, do not  
operate the wipers when the  
windshield is dry.  
• To prevent damage to the wiper  
blades, do not use gasoline,  
kerosene, paint thinner, or other  
solvents on or near them.  
WARNING  
Do not use the washer in freezing  
temperatures without first warming  
the windshield with the defrosters;  
the washer solution could freeze on  
the windshield and obscure your  
vision.  
• To prevent damage to the wiper  
arms and other components, do  
not attempt to move the wipers  
manually.  
OXM049048E  
Windshield washers (front)  
(if equipped)  
In the O (Off) position, pull the lever gen-  
tly toward you to spray washer fluid on  
the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3  
cycles.  
Use this function when the windshield is  
dirty.  
The spray and wiper operation will con-  
tinue until you release the lever.  
If the washer does not work, check the  
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not  
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-  
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid  
to the washer reservoir.  
The reservoir filler neck is located in the  
front of the engine compartment on the  
passenger side.  
4 121  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 122  
Features of your vehicle  
Headlight washer (if equipped)  
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-  
light washer it will operate at the same  
time when you operate the windshield  
washer. It will operate when the headlight  
switch is in the first or second position  
and the ignition switch or engine  
start/stop button is in the ON position.  
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the  
headlights.  
✽
NOTICE  
OXM049103E  
OXM049125L  
Check the headlight washers periodical-  
ly to confirm that the washer fluid is  
being sprayed properly onto the head-  
light lenses.  
Push the lever away from you to spray  
rear washer fluid and to run the rear  
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper  
operation will continue until you release  
the lever.  
Rear window wiper and washer  
switch (if equipped)  
The rear window wiper and washer  
switch is located at the end of the wiper  
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch  
to desired position to operate the rear  
wiper and washer.  
- Normal wiper operation  
--- - Intermittent wipe  
O - Wiper is not in operation  
4 122  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 123  
Features of your vehicle  
INTERIOR LIGHT  
CAUTION  
Do not use the interior lights for  
extended periods when the engine  
is not running.  
■ Type A  
•
/DOOR (3) :  
- The map lamp comes on when a door  
is opened. If you close the door, the  
lamps go out after approximately 30  
seconds.  
It may cause battery discharge.  
- The map lamp comes on for approxi-  
mately 30 seconds when doors are  
unlocked with a transmitter or smart  
key as long as the doors are not  
opened.  
WARNING  
Do not use the interior lights when  
driving in the dark. Accidents could  
happen because the view may be  
obscured by interior lights.  
OGD041104  
- The map lamp will stay on for approxi-  
mately 20 minutes if a door is opened  
with the ignition switch in the ACC or  
LOCK/OFF position.  
■ Type B  
- The map lamp will stay on continu-  
ously if the door is opened with the  
ignition switch in the ON position.  
Interior lamp AUTO cut  
• When all entrances are closed, if you  
lock the vehicle by using the transmit-  
ter or the smart key, all interior lamp  
will be off after a few seconds.  
- The map lamp will go out immediate-  
ly if the ignition switch is changed to  
the ON position or all doors are  
locked.  
• If you do not operate anything in the  
vehicle after turning off the engine, the  
lights will turn off after 20 minutes.  
OJD042091  
•
/ON (4) : The map lamp stays on  
at all times.  
Map lamp  
Press the lens (1) to turn the map lamp  
on or off  
✽
NOTICE  
When the lamp is turned on by pressing  
the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off  
even if the switch is in the OFF position  
(2).  
•
/OFF (2) : The lamps are off even  
if a door is opened.  
4 123  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 124  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
Type B  
Press the switch  
room lamp.  
to turn on the  
Press the switch O to turn off the room  
lamp.  
OGDE041216  
■ Type B  
OLM049105  
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)  
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.  
•
: The lamp will turn on if this button  
is pressed.  
•
: The lamp will turn off if this button  
is pressed.  
CAUTION  
- Vanity mirror lamp  
OGD041151  
Room lamp  
Type A  
Always have the switch in the off  
position when the vanity mirror  
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is  
closed without the lamp off, it may  
discharge the battery or damage  
the sunvisor.  
Press the button to turn the light on or off.  
If the map lamp turns on by the map  
lamp switch, the room lamp will turn on.  
4 124  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 125  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD042092  
OJD042093  
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may  
differ from the illustration.  
Glove box lamp  
The glove box lamp comes on when the  
glove box is opened.  
Luggage room lamp  
The luggage room lamp comes on when  
the tailgate is opened.  
4 125  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 126  
Features of your vehicle  
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
Headlamp welcome  
Interior light  
Puddle lamp (if equipped)  
When the headlight(light switch in the  
headlight or AUTO position) is on and all  
doors (and tailgate) are locked and  
closed, the headlight, position light and  
tail light will come on for 15 seconds if  
any of the below is performed.  
When the interior light switch is in the  
DOOR position and all doors (and tail-  
gate) are locked and closed, the room  
lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any  
of the below is performed.  
When all doors are locked and closed,  
the puddle lamp will come on for 15 sec-  
onds if any of the below is performed.  
• Without smart key system  
- When the door unlock button is  
pressed on the transmitter.  
• With the smart key system  
• Without smart key system  
• Without smart key system  
- When the door unlock button is  
pressed on the transmitter.  
• With the smart key system  
- When the door unlock button is  
pressed on the transmitter.  
• With the smart key system  
- When the door unlock button is  
pressed on the smart key.  
- When the door unlock button is  
pressed on the smart key.  
- When the button of the outside door  
handle is pressed.  
- When the door unlock button is  
pressed on the smart key.  
- When the button of the outside door  
handle is pressed.  
- When the vehicle is approached with  
the smart key in possession.  
At this time, if you press the door lock but-  
ton (on the transmitter or smart key), the  
lights will turn off immediately.  
At this time, if you press the door lock but-  
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.  
At this time, if you press the door lock but-  
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.  
4 126  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 127  
Features of your vehicle  
DEFROSTER  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the conduc-  
tors bonded to the inside surface of  
the rear window, never use sharp  
instruments or window cleaners  
containing abrasives to clean the  
window.  
■ Manual climate control  
• To activate the rear window defroster,  
press the rear window defroster button  
located in the center facia switch  
panel. The indicator on the rear win-  
dow defroster button illuminates when  
the defroster is ON.  
• To turn off the defroster, press the rear  
window defroster button again.  
✽
NOTICE  
✽
NOTICE  
OJD042094  
• If there is heavy accumulation of snow  
on the rear window, brush it off before  
operating the rear defroster.  
• The rear window defroster automati-  
cally turns off after approximately 20  
minutes or when the ignition switch is  
turned off.  
If you want to defrost and defog the  
front windshield, refer to “Windshield  
Defrosting and Defogging” in this chap-  
ter.  
■ Automatic climate control  
Outside mirror defroster  
(if equipped)  
The outside mirror defroster will operate  
at the same time you turn on the rear  
window defroster.  
OJD042095  
Rear window defroster  
The defroster heats the window to  
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the  
interior and exterior of the rear window,  
while engine is running.  
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)  
The front wiper deicer will operate at the  
same time you turn on the rear window  
defroster.  
4 127  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 128  
Features of your vehicle  
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Fan speed control knob  
2. Air conditioning button  
3. Rear window defroster button  
4. Mode selection knob  
5. Air intake control button  
6. Temperature control knob  
CAUTION  
Operating the blower when the igni-  
tion switch is in the ON position  
could cause the battery to dis-  
charge. Operate the blower when the  
ignition switch is in the ON position.  
OJD042100  
4 128  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 129  
Features of your vehicle  
Heating and air conditioning  
1. Start the engine.  
2. Set the mode to the desired position.  
To improve the effectiveness of heat-  
ing and cooling:  
- Heating:  
- Cooling:  
3. Set the temperature control to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the air intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air or recirculated position.  
5. Set the fan speed control to the  
desired speed.  
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air  
conditioning system on. (if equipped)  
(if equipped)  
OJD042102  
4 129  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:29 PM Page 130  
Features of your vehicle  
Face/Floor/Defrost-Level  
(A, B, C, D, E, F)  
Face-Level (B, D, F)  
Air flow is directed toward the upper body  
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be  
controlled to direct the air discharged  
from the outlet.  
Most of the air flow is directed towards  
the face, the floor and the windshield with  
a small amount of air directed to the side  
window defrosters.  
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)  
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)  
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor  
and the windshield with a small amount  
directed to the side window defrosters.  
Air flow is directed towards the face and  
the floor.  
OJD042104  
Mode selection  
The mode selection knob controls the  
direction of the air flow through the venti-  
lation system.  
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)  
Defrost-Level (A, D)  
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-  
board outlets, or windshield. Six symbols  
are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,  
Floor, Face / Floor / Defrost, Floor /  
Defrost and Defrost air position.  
Most of the air flow is directed to the  
floor, with a small amount of the air being  
directed to the windshield and side win-  
dow defrosters.  
Most of the air flow is directed to the  
windshield with a small amount of air  
directed to the side window defrosters.  
4 130  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 131  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD042107  
OJD042105  
OJD042106  
Temperature control  
Air intake control  
The temperature control knob allows you  
to control the temperature of the airflow  
in the vehicle.  
The air intake control is used to select  
the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-  
lated air position.  
To change the temperature:  
• Turn the knob to the right to increase  
temperature.  
To change the air intake control position,  
press the control button.  
• Turn the knob to the left to decrease  
temperature.  
OJD042108  
Instrument panel vents  
The outlet vents can be opened or closed  
separately using the thumbwheel or vent  
control lever.  
Also, you can adjust the direction of air  
delivery from these vents using the vent  
control lever as shown.  
4 131  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 132  
Features of your vehicle  
Recirculated air position  
With the recirculated air  
position selected, air  
from the passenger  
compartment will be  
drawn through the heat-  
ing system and heated  
or cooled according to  
the function selected.  
WARNING  
• The continuous use of recirculat-  
ed air in the climate control sys-  
tem may increase humidity inside  
the vehicle, causing the glass to  
fog and obscuring visibility.  
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the  
air conditioning or heating sys-  
tem on. It may cause serious  
harm or death due to a drop in the  
oxygen level and/or body temper-  
ature.  
Outside (fresh) air position  
With the outside (fresh)  
air position selected, air  
enters the vehicle from  
outside and is heated or  
cooled according to the  
function selected.  
OJD042101  
Fan speed control  
The ignition switch must be in the ON  
position for fan operation.  
• The continuous use of recirculat-  
ed air in the climate control sys-  
tem can produce drowsiness or  
sleepiness, which may result in a  
loss of vehicle control. Set the air  
intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air position as much as  
possible while driving.  
The fan speed control knob allows you to  
control the fan speed of the air flowing  
from the ventilation system. To change  
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right  
for higher speed or left for lower speed.  
✽
NOTICE  
Prolonged operation of the heater in the  
recirculated air position (without air  
conditioning selected) may cause fogging  
of the windshield and side windows and  
the air within the passenger compart-  
ment may become stale.  
Setting the fan speed control knob to the  
“0” position turns off the fan.  
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-  
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-  
tion selected will result in excessively dry  
air in the passenger compartment.  
4 132  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 133  
Features of your vehicle  
System operation  
Ventilation  
1. Set the mode to the  
position.  
2. Set the air intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air position.  
3. Set the temperature control to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan speed control to the  
desired speed.  
Heating  
1. Set the mode to the  
OJD043247  
OJD042103  
position.  
To turn off the blowers  
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan  
speed control knob to the "0" position.  
Air conditioning (if equipped)  
2. Set the air intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air position.  
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-  
ditioning system on (indicator light will  
illuminate). Press the button again to turn  
the air conditioning system off.  
3. Set the temperature control to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan speed control to the  
desired speed.  
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn  
the air conditioning system on.  
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode  
to the  
position.  
4 133  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 134  
Features of your vehicle  
Operation Tips  
Air conditioning (if equipped)  
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled  
with environmentally friendly refrigerant*.  
CAUTION  
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from  
entering the vehicle through the venti-  
lation system, temporarily set the air  
intake control to the recirculated air  
position. Be sure to return the control  
to the fresh air position when the irrita-  
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the  
vehicle. This will help keep the driver  
alert and comfortable.  
• The refrigerant system should  
only be serviced by trained and  
certified technicians to insure  
proper and safe operation.  
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-  
tioning button.  
2. Set the mode to the  
position.  
• The refrigerant system should be  
serviced in  
place.  
3. Set the air intake control to the outside  
air or recirculated air position.  
a
well-ventilated  
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-  
perature control to maintain maximum  
comfort.  
• The air conditioning evaporator  
(cooling coil) shall never be  
repaired or replaced with one  
removed from a used or salvaged  
vehicle and new replacement  
MAC evaporators shall be certi-  
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE  
Standard J2842.  
• Air for the heating/cooling system is  
drawn in through the grilles just ahead  
of the windshield. Care should be  
taken that these are not blocked by  
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.  
*:Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-  
1234yf according to the regulation in  
your country at the time of producing.  
You can find out which air conditioning  
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle at  
the label inside of hood. Refer to chap-  
ter 8 for more detail location of air con-  
ditioning refrigerant label.  
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-  
shield, set the air intake control to the  
fresh air position and fan speed to the  
desired position, turn on the air condi-  
tioning system, and adjust the temper-  
ature control to desired temperature.  
4 134  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 135  
Features of your vehicle  
Air conditioning system operation tips  
✽
NOTICE  
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct  
sunlight during hot weather, open the  
windows for a short time to let the hot  
air inside the vehicle escape.  
Outside air  
• When using the air conditioning sys-  
tem, monitor the temperature gauge  
closely while driving up hills or in  
heavy traffic when outside tempera-  
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-  
tem operation may cause engine over-  
heating. Continue to use the blower  
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-  
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-  
cates engine overheating.  
• When opening the windows in humid  
weather air conditioning may create  
water droplets inside the vehicle.  
Since excessive water droplets may  
cause damage to electrical equipment,  
air conditioning should only be used  
with the windows closed.  
Recirculated  
air  
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-  
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on  
rainy or humid days.  
• During air conditioning system opera-  
tion, you may occasionally notice a slight  
change in engine speed as the air con-  
ditioning compressor cycles. This is a  
normal system operation characteristic.  
Blower  
Climate control  
air filter  
Heater core  
1LDA5047  
Evaporator  
core  
• Use the air conditioning system every  
month only for a few minutes to ensure  
maximum system performance.  
Climate control air filter  
The climate control air filter installed  
behind the glove box filters the dust or  
other pollutants that come into the vehi-  
cle from the outside through the heating  
and air conditioning system. If dust or  
other pollutants accumulate in the filter  
over a period of time, the air flow from the  
air vents may decrease, resulting in  
moisture accumulation on the inside of  
the windshield even when the outside  
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-  
pens, we recommend that the climate  
control air filter be replaced by an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
• When using the air conditioning sys-  
tem, you may notice clear water drip-  
ping (or even puddling) on the ground  
under the passenger side of the vehi-  
cle. This is a normal system operation  
characteristic.  
• Operating the air conditioning system  
in the recirculated air position provides  
maximum cooling, however, continual  
operation in this mode may cause the  
air inside the vehicle to become stale.  
• During cooling operation, you may  
occasionally notice a misty air flow  
because of rapid cooling and humid air  
intake. This is a normal system opera-  
tion characteristic.  
4 135  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 136  
Features of your vehicle  
Checking the amount of air con-  
ditioner refrigerant and compres-  
sor lubricant  
✽
NOTICE  
• Replace the filter according to the  
Maintenance Schedule.  
WARNING - Vehicles  
equipped with R-1234yf*  
Because the refrigerant  
is mildly inflammable  
and at very high pres-  
sure, the air conditioning  
system should only be  
serviced by trained and  
certified technicians. It is  
important that the cor-  
rect type and amount of  
oil and refrigerant is used.  
If the car is being driven in severe  
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,  
more frequent climate control air fil-  
ter inspections and changes are  
required.  
• When the air flow rate suddenly  
decreases, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
When the amount of refrigerant is low,  
the performance of the air conditioning is  
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-  
ence on the air conditioning system.  
Therefore, if abnormal operation is found,  
we recommend that the system be inspect-  
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.  
WARNING - Vehicles  
equipped with R-134a*  
Otherwise, it may cause damage to  
the vehicle and personal injury.  
Because the refrigerant  
is at very high pressure,  
the air conditioning sys-  
tem should only be  
serviced by trained and  
*:Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-  
1234yf according to the regulation in  
your country at the time of producing.  
You can find out which air conditioning  
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at  
the label inside of hood. Refer to chap-  
ter 8 for more detail location of air con-  
ditioning refrigerant label.  
certified technicians. It is important  
that the correct type and amount of  
oil and refrigerant is used.  
Otherwise, it may cause damage to  
the vehicle and personal injury.  
4 136  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 137  
Features of your vehicle  
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Driver's temperature control knob  
2. AUTO (automatic control) button  
3. Fan speed control button (Higher speed)  
4. Fan speed control button (Lower speed)  
5. Climate control display  
8. Passenger's temperature control knob  
9. Dual temperature control selection button  
10. OFF button  
11. Front windshield defroster button  
12. Mode selection button  
13. Rear window defroster button  
6. Air conditioning button  
7. Air intake control button  
OJD042109  
4 137  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 138  
Features of your vehicle  
Soft mode  
Each time you press the AUTO button,  
the mode will change as follows:  
Automatic heating and air condi-  
tioning  
Soft mode ↔ Fast mode  
The automatic climate control system is  
controlled by simply setting the desired  
temperature.  
The Full Automatic Temperature Control  
(FATC) system automatically controls the  
heating and cooling system as follows:  
1. Press the AUTO button.  
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and  
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-  
matically according to the temperature  
setting.  
OJD042110  
Fast mode  
OJD042119  
You can choose either the soft mode or  
fast mode to select the fan speed.  
Soft mode : The wind blows gently.  
Fast mode : The wind blows heavier than  
the soft mode to reach the selected tem-  
perature fast.  
4 138  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 139  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE  
• To turn the automatic operation off,  
select any button of the following:  
- Mode selection button  
- Front windshield defrost button  
(Press the button one more time to  
deselect the front windshield  
defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign  
will illuminate on the information  
display once again.)  
- Fan speed control button  
The selected function will be con-  
trolled manually while other functions  
operate automatically.  
• For your convenience and to improve  
the effectiveness of the climate con-  
trol, use the AUTO button and set the  
temperature to 22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F  
-Except Europe).  
OJD042230  
OGD041120  
2. Turn the temperature control knob to  
set the desired temperature.  
✽
NOTICE  
Placing any object over the sensor on  
the instrument panel may interfere with  
the heating and cooling system.  
4 139  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 140  
Features of your vehicle  
Manual heating and air condition-  
ing  
The heating and cooling system can be  
controlled manually by pressing buttons  
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO  
button. In this case, the system works  
sequentially according to the order of  
buttons or knob(s) selected.  
1. Start the engine.  
2. Set the mode to the desired position.  
To improve the effectiveness of heat-  
ing and cooling:  
- Heating:  
- Cooling:  
3. Set the temperature control to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the air intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air or recirculated position.  
5. Set the fan speed control to the  
desired speed.  
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the  
air conditioning system on.  
Press the AUTO button in order to con-  
vert to full automatic control of the sys-  
tem.  
(if equipped)  
OJD042102  
Mode selection  
The mode selection button controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.  
If you push the button once, the corresponding switch will turn on, and if you push the  
button again, the switch will turn off.  
4 140  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:30 PM Page 141  
Features of your vehicle  
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)  
Most of the air flow is directed to the  
floor.  
Defrost-Level (A, D)  
Most of the air flow is directed to the  
windshield.  
OJD042116  
OJD042122  
Maximum (MAX) defrost mode  
When you select the MAX defrost mode,  
the following system will set automatically:  
Also you may select 2~3 modes at the  
same time.  
Face-Level (B, D, F*)  
- face (  
- face (  
- floor (  
) + floor (  
) mode  
) mode  
) mode  
• The air conditioning system will be turn  
on.  
Air flow is directed toward the upper body  
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be  
controlled to direct the air discharged  
from the outlet.  
) + defrost (  
) + defrost (  
) + floor (  
• The outside(fresh) air position will be  
selected.  
- face (  
mode  
) + defrost (  
)
• The fan speed will set to the high  
speed.  
* : if equipped  
To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press  
the mode button or MAX defrost button  
again or AUTO button.  
4 141  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 142  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Driver’s side  
■ Passenger’s side  
OJD042107  
OJD042113  
OJD042112  
Adjusting the driver and passenger side  
temperature individually  
Temperature control  
The temperature will increase to the  
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the  
right extremely.  
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the  
driver and passenger side temperature  
individually. Also, if the passenger side  
temperature control knob is operated,  
it will automatically change to the  
DUAL mode as well.  
The temperature will decrease to the  
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the  
left extremely.  
When turning the knob, the temperature  
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.  
When set to the lowest temperature set-  
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-  
tinuously.  
2. Operate the driver side temperature  
control to adjust the driver side tem-  
perature. Operate the passenger side  
temperature control to adjust the pas-  
senger side temperature.  
OJD042108  
Instrument panel vents  
The outlet vents can be opened or closed  
separately using the thumbwheel or vent  
control lever.  
Operate the driver’s side temperature  
control to adjust the driver side tempera-  
ture. Operate the passenger’s side tem-  
perature control to adjust the passenger  
side temperature.  
Also, you can adjust the direction of air  
delivery from these vents using the vent  
control lever as shown.  
When the driver side temperature is set  
to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)  
temperature, the DUAL mode deacti-  
vates for maximum heating or cooling.  
4 142  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 143  
Features of your vehicle  
Adjusting the driver and passenger side  
temperature equally  
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-  
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger  
side temperature will be set to the  
same temperature as the driver side.  
Recirculated air position  
With the recirculated air  
position selected, air from  
the passenger compart-  
ment will be drawn through  
the heating system and  
heated or cooled according  
to the function selected.  
2. Operate the driver side temperature  
control button. The driver and passen-  
ger side temperature will be adjusted  
equally.  
Outside (fresh) air position  
With the outside (fresh) air  
position selected, air  
Temperature conversion  
OJD042117  
You can switch the temperature mode  
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as  
follows:  
enters the vehicle from out-  
side and is heated or  
cooled according to the  
function selected.  
Air intake control  
This is used to select the outside (fresh)  
air position or recirculated air position.  
While pressing the DUAL button, press  
the Face-Level selection button  
seconds or more.  
for 3  
To change the air intake control position,  
push the control button.  
✽
NOTICE  
The display will change from Centigrade  
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to  
Centigrade.  
Prolonged operation of the heater in the  
recirculated air position (without air  
conditioning selected) may cause fog-  
ging of the windshield and side windows  
and the air within the passenger com-  
partment may become stale.  
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-  
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-  
tion selected will result in excessively dry  
air in the passenger compartment.  
✽
NOTICE  
If the battery has been discharged or  
disconnected, the temperature mode  
display will reset to Centigrade.  
4 143  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 144  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING  
• The continuous use of recirculat-  
ed air in the climate control sys-  
tem may increase humidity inside  
the vehicle, causing the glass to  
fog and obscuring visibility.  
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the  
air conditioning or heating sys-  
tem on. It may cause serious  
harm or death due to a drop in the  
oxygen level and/or body temper-  
ature.  
OJD042115  
OJD042114  
• The continuous use of recirculat-  
ed air in the climate control sys-  
tem can produce drowsiness or  
sleepiness, which may result in a  
loss of vehicle control. Set the air  
intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air position as much as  
possible while driving.  
Fan speed control  
Air conditioning (if equipped)  
The fan speed can be set to the desired  
speed by pressing the fan speed control  
button.  
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-  
ditioning system on (indicator light will  
illuminate).  
To change the fan speed, press the upper  
button ( ) for higher speed, or press  
the lower button ( ) for lower speed.  
Press the button again to turn the air  
conditioning system off.  
Pressing the OFF button turns off the  
fan.  
4 144  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 145  
Features of your vehicle  
Operation Tips  
System operation  
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from  
entering the vehicle through the venti-  
lation system, temporarily set the air  
intake control to the recirculated air  
position. Be sure to return the control  
to the fresh air position when the irrita-  
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the  
vehicle. This will help keep the driver  
alert and comfortable.  
Ventilation  
1. Set the mode to the  
position.  
2. Set the air intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air position.  
3. Set the temperature control to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan speed control to the  
desired speed.  
• Air for the heating/cooling system is  
drawn in through the grilles just ahead  
of the windshield. Care should be  
taken that these are not blocked by  
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.  
Heating  
1. Set the mode to the  
OJD042118  
position.  
OFF mode  
2. Set the air intake control to the outside  
(fresh) air position.  
Press the OFF button to turn off the air  
climate control system. However, you can  
still operate the air intake buttons as long  
as the ignition switch is in the ON posi-  
tion.  
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-  
shield, set the air intake control to the  
fresh air position and fan speed to the  
desired position, turn on the air condi-  
tioning system, and adjust the temper-  
ature control to desired temperature.  
3. Set the temperature control to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan speed control to the  
desired speed.  
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn  
the air conditioning system on.  
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode  
to the  
or  
position.  
4 145  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 146  
Features of your vehicle  
Air conditioning (if equipped)  
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled  
with environmentally friendly refrigerant*.  
✽
NOTICE  
CAUTION  
• When using the air conditioning sys-  
tem, monitor the temperature gauge  
closely while driving up hills or in  
heavy traffic when outside tempera-  
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-  
tem operation may cause engine over-  
heating. Continue to use the blower  
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-  
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-  
cates engine overheating.  
• When opening the windows in humid  
weather air conditioning may create  
water droplets inside the vehicle.  
Since excessive water droplets may  
cause damage to electrical equipment,  
air conditioning should only be used  
with the windows closed.  
• The refrigerant system should  
only be serviced by trained and  
certified technicians to insure  
proper and safe operation.  
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-  
tioning button.  
2. Set the mode to the  
position.  
• The refrigerant system should be  
serviced in  
place.  
3. Set the air intake control to the outside  
air or recirculated air position.  
a
well-ventilated  
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-  
perature control to maintain maximum  
comfort.  
• The air conditioning evaporator  
(cooling coil) shall never be  
repaired or replaced with one  
removed from a used or salvaged  
vehicle and new replacement  
MAC evaporators shall be certi-  
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE  
Standard J2842.  
*:Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-  
1234yf according to the regulation in  
your country at the time of producing.  
You can find out which air conditioning  
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle at  
the label inside of hood. Refer to chap-  
ter 8 for more detail location of air con-  
ditioning refrigerant label.  
4 146  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 147  
Features of your vehicle  
Air conditioning system operation tips  
• When using the air conditioning sys-  
tem, you may notice clear water drip-  
ping (or even puddling) on the ground  
under the passenger side of the vehi-  
cle. This is a normal system operation  
characteristic.  
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct  
sunlight during hot weather, open the  
windows for a short time to let the hot  
air inside the vehicle escape.  
Outside air  
Recirculated  
air  
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-  
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on  
rainy or humid days.  
• Operating the air conditioning system  
in the recirculated air position provides  
maximum cooling, however, continual  
operation in this mode may cause the  
air inside the vehicle to become stale.  
• During air conditioning system opera-  
tion, you may occasionally notice a  
slight change in engine speed as the  
air conditioning compressor cycles.  
This is a normal system operation  
characteristic.  
Blower  
Climate control  
air filter  
Heater core  
1LDA5047  
Evaporator  
core  
• During cooling operation, you may  
occasionally notice a misty air flow  
because of rapid cooling and humid air  
intake. This is a normal system opera-  
tion characteristic.  
Climate control air filter  
• Use the air conditioning system every  
month only for a few minutes to ensure  
maximum system performance.  
The climate control air filter installed  
behind the glove box filters the dust or  
other pollutants that come into the vehi-  
cle from the outside through the heating  
and air conditioning system. If dust or  
other pollutants accumulate in the filter  
over a period of time, the air flow from the  
air vents may decrease, resulting in  
moisture accumulation on the inside of  
the windshield even when the outside  
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-  
pens, we recommend that the climate  
control air filter be replaced by an author-  
ized Kia dealer.  
4 147  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 148  
Features of your vehicle  
Checking the amount of air con-  
ditioner refrigerant and compres-  
sor lubricant  
✽
NOTICE  
• Replace the filter according to the  
Maintenance Schedule.  
WARNING - Vehicles  
equipped with R-1234yf*  
Because the refrigerant  
is mildly inflammable  
and at very high pres-  
sure, the air conditioning  
system should only be  
serviced by trained and  
certified technicians. It is  
important that the cor-  
rect type and amount of  
oil and refrigerant is used.  
If the car is being driven in severe  
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,  
more frequent climate control air fil-  
ter inspections and changes are  
required.  
• When the air flow rate suddenly  
decreases, we recommend that the  
system be checked by an authorized  
Kia dealer.  
When the amount of refrigerant is low,  
the performance of the air conditioning is  
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-  
ence on the air conditioning system.  
Therefore, if abnormal operation is  
found, we recommend that the system be  
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.  
WARNING - Vehicles  
equipped with R-134a*  
Otherwise, it may cause damage to  
the vehicle and personal injury.  
Because the refrigerant  
is at very high pressure,  
the air conditioning sys-  
tem should only be  
serviced by trained and  
*:Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-  
1234yf according to the regulation in  
your country at the time of producing.  
You can find out which air conditioning  
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at  
the label inside of hood. Refer to chap-  
ter 8 for more detail location of air con-  
ditioning refrigerant label.  
certified technicians. It is important  
that the correct type and amount of  
oil and refrigerant is used.  
Otherwise, it may cause damage to  
the vehicle and personal injury.  
4 148  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 149  
Features of your vehicle  
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING  
WARNING - Windshield  
heating  
Do not use the  
position during  
cooling operation in extremely  
humid weather. The difference  
between the temperature of the out-  
side air and the windshield could  
cause the outer surface of the  
windshield to fog up, causing loss  
of visibility. In this case, set the  
mode selection to the  
position  
OJD042123  
OJD042124  
and fan speed control to the lower  
speed.  
To defrost outside windshield  
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-  
tion.  
Manual climate control system  
To defog inside windshield  
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-  
perature control to the hottest position  
and the fan speed control to the high-  
est speed.  
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-  
tion.  
2. Select desired temperature.  
2. Set the temperature to the hottest  
position.  
3. Select the  
position.  
3. Select the  
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected  
automatically. If the position is  
selected, air conditioning (if equipped)  
will also be selected automatically.  
position.  
• If warm air to the floor is desired while  
defrosting or defogging, set the mode  
to the floor-defrost position.  
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-  
tioning will be selected automatically.  
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice  
from the windshield, rear window, out-  
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-  
dows.  
If the air conditioning and/or outside  
(fresh) air position are not selected auto-  
matically, press the corresponding button  
manually.  
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood  
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve  
heater and defroster efficiency and to  
reduce the probability of fogging up the  
inside of the windshield.  
4 149  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 150  
Features of your vehicle  
OJD042125  
Automatic climate control system  
To defog inside windshield  
OJD042126  
OGDE041135  
To defrost outside windshield  
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-  
tion.  
Auto defogging system  
(Only for automatic climate control  
system, if equipped)  
1. Set the fan speed to the desired  
speed.  
2. Select desired temperature.  
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of  
fogging up the inside of the windshield by  
2. Set the temperature to the hottest  
(HIGH) position.  
automatically sensing the moisture of  
inside the windshield.  
3. Press the  
button.  
3. Press the  
button.  
4. The air conditioning will turn on  
according to the detected ambient  
temperature and outside (fresh) air  
position will be selected automatically.  
4. The air conditioning will turn on  
according to the detected ambient tem-  
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-  
tion will be selected automatically.  
The auto defogging system operates  
when the climate control system is on.  
✽
NOTICE  
If the air conditioning is not selected  
automatically, adjust the corresponding  
The auto defogging system may not  
operate normally, when the outside tem-  
perture is below -15 °C.  
button manually. If the  
position is  
selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a  
higher fan speed.  
4 150  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 151  
Features of your vehicle  
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)  
This indicator illuminates  
when the auto defogging  
system senses the moisture  
of inside the windshield and  
operates.  
✽
NOTICE  
If the A/C off is manually selected while  
the auto defogging system is on, the auto  
defogging indicator will blink 3 times to  
give notice that the A/C off can not be  
selected.  
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher  
steps operate as follow.  
CAUTION  
Do not remove the sensor cover  
located on the upper end of the  
driver side windshield glass.  
Damage to the system parts could  
occur and may not be covered by  
your vehicle warranty.  
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning  
Step 2 : Outside air position  
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the wind-  
shield  
OJD042129  
When the ignition switch is in the ON  
position, the clean air function turns on  
automatically.  
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the  
windshield  
Also, the clean air function turns off auto-  
matically, when the ignition switch turns  
to the OFF position.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto  
defogging system, it is automatically acti-  
vated when the conditions are met.  
However, if you would like to cancel the  
auto defogging system, press the front  
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds  
while pressing the AUTO button. The  
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you  
that the system is cancelled. To use the  
auto defogging system again, follow the  
procedures mentioned above.  
If the battery has been disconnected or  
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-  
ging status.  
4 151  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 152  
Features of your vehicle  
STORAGE COMPARTMENT  
CAUTION  
• To avoid possible theft, do not  
leave valuables in the storage  
compartment.  
• Always keep the storage com-  
partment covers closed while  
driving. Do not attempt to place  
so many items in the storage  
compartment that the storage  
compartment cover can not close  
securely.  
OJD042130  
OJD042131  
Center console storage  
Sliding armrest (if equipped)  
WARNING - Flammable  
materials  
To open the center console storage, push  
the lever and then lift up the cover.  
To move forward  
Grab the front portion of the armrest (1)  
then pull it forward  
Do not store cigarette lighters,  
propane cylinders, or other flamma-  
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-  
cle. These items may catch fire  
and/or explode if the vehicle is  
exposed to hot temperatures for  
extended periods.  
To move rearward  
Push the armrest rearward with your  
palm.  
WARNING  
Do not grab the front portion of the  
armrest (1) when moving the arm-  
rest rearward. It may pinch your fin-  
gers.  
4 152  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 153  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING  
Do not put perishable food in the  
cool box because it may not main-  
tain the necessary consistent tem-  
perature to keep the food fresh.  
Close  
Open  
OJD042132  
OJD042133  
Glove box  
Cool box (if equipped)  
To open the glove box, push the button  
and the glove box will automatically  
open. Close the glove box after use.  
You can keep beverage cans or other  
items cool in the glove box.  
1. Turn on the air conditioning. The tem-  
perature of the cool box will change  
according to the temperature of air  
conditioning.  
WARNING  
To reduce the risk of injury in an  
accident or sudden stop, always  
keep the glove box door closed  
while driving.  
2. Turn the knob to the open position.  
3. When the cool box is not used, turn the  
knob to the close position.  
✽
NOTICE  
If some items in the cool box block the  
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool  
box is reduced.  
CAUTION  
Do not keep food in the glove box  
for a long time.  
4 153  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:31 PM Page 154  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING  
• Do not keep objects except sun-  
glasses inside the sunglass hold-  
er. Such objects can be thrown  
from the holder in the event of a  
sudden stop or an accident, pos-  
sibly injuring the passengers in  
the vehicle.  
• Do not open the sunglasses hold-  
er while the vehicle is moving.  
The rear view mirror of the vehi-  
cle can be blocked by an open  
sunglass holder.  
OGDE042313  
OGD041139  
Sunglass holder  
• Do not put the glasses forcibly  
into a sunglass holder to prevent  
breakage or deformation of  
glasses. It may cause personal  
injury if you try to open it forcibly  
when the glasses are jammed in  
holder.  
To open the sunglass holder, press the  
cover and the holder will slowly open.  
Place your sunglasses in the compart-  
ment door with the lenses facing out.  
Push to close.  
OGDE042314  
Luggage tray (wagon)  
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-  
angle (front tray), tools, etc. in the box for  
easy access.  
Grasp the handle on the top of the cover  
and lift it.  
4 154  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 155  
Features of your vehicle  
INTERIOR FEATURES  
■ 3 Door and 5 Door  
WARNING  
• Holding the lighter in after it is  
heated will cause it to overheat.  
• If the lighter does not pop out  
within 30 seconds, remove it to  
prevent overheating.  
• Do not insert foreign objects into  
the socket of the cigarette lighter.  
It may damage the cigarette  
lighter.  
OJD042153  
■ Wagon  
OJD042134  
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-  
tion switch must be in the ACC position  
or the ON position.  
The use of plug-in accessories  
(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and  
coffee pots, etc.) may damage the  
socket or cause electrical failure.  
To use the cigarette lighter:  
Push the lighter all the way into the socket.  
When the element has heated, the lighter  
will pop out to the "ready" position.  
OGDE042310  
We recommend that you use parts for  
replacement from an authorized Kia  
dealer.  
Luggage side tray (if equipped)  
The luggage side tray can be used for  
storing small items.  
To open the cover, pull up the handle and  
lift the cover.  
4 155  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 156  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
CAUTION  
WARNING - Ashtray use  
When cleaning spilled liquid, do not  
dry the cup holder at high tempera-  
tures.This may damage the chrome  
part of the cup holder.  
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray  
as a waste receptacle.  
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches  
in an ashtray with other com-  
bustible materials may cause a  
fire.  
OJD042135  
■ Type B  
OJD042136  
Ashtray (if equipped)  
To use the ashtray, open the cover. (Type B)  
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.  
4 156  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 157  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Front  
• Type A  
Cup holder  
✽
NOTICE  
• Keep your drinks sealed while driving  
to prevent spilling your drink. If liq-  
uid spills, it may get into the vehicle's  
electrical/electronic system and dam-  
age electrical/electronic parts.  
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do not  
dry the cup holder at high tempera-  
ture. This may damage the cup holder.  
WARNING - Hot liquids  
• Do not place uncovered cups of  
hot liquid in the cup holder while  
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot  
liquid spills, you may burn your-  
self. Such a burn to the driver  
could lead to loss of control of  
the vehicle.  
OJD042137  
• To reduce the risk of personal  
injury in the event of sudden stop  
or collision, do not place uncov-  
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-  
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder  
while the vehicle is in motion.  
• Type B  
WARNING  
Keep cans and bottles out of direct  
sunlight. Placing them in a hot vehi-  
cle can cause them to explode.  
OJD042138  
Cups or small beverage cans may be  
placed in the cup holders.  
CAUTION  
Do not place uncovered cups in the  
cup holder while the vehicle is in  
motion. If the liquid spills, electric  
systems may malfunction.  
Type B  
To use the cup holder, open the cover.  
4 157  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 158  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Rear (if equipped)  
OJD042162  
OMD040167K  
OJD042139  
Rear  
To use the cup holder, pull down the arm-  
rest.  
Bottle holder  
Sunvisor  
Bottles may be placed in the holder.  
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light  
through the front or side windows.  
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.  
✽
NOTICE  
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull  
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket  
(1) and swing it to the side. (2)  
Only bottles should be placee in the  
holder as it is written in the vehicle  
“BOTTLE ONLY”.  
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the  
visor and open the mirror cover (3).  
To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch it  
on. (if equipped)  
The ticket holder (4) is provided for hold-  
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)  
4 158  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 159  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Front  
• Type A  
■ Rear (if equipped)  
• Type A  
✽
NOTICE  
Close the vanity mirror cover securely  
and return the sunvisor to its original  
position after use.  
CAUTION - Vanity mirror  
lamp (if equipped)  
Always have the switch in the off  
position when the vanity mirror  
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is  
closed without the lamp off, it may  
discharge the battery or damage  
the sunvisor.  
OJD042140  
OJD042155  
• Type B  
• Type B  
WARNING  
For your safety, do not obstruct your  
vision when using the sunvisor.  
❈ To learn how to use the vanity mirror  
lamp, refer to "Interior light" in this  
chapter.  
OJD042154  
OJD042243  
Power outlet  
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other  
devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should  
draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.  
4 159  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 160  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
(Continued)  
• Make sure that the electric  
devices are plugged in securely. If  
not, it could cause a malfunction  
of electric systems.  
• Use power outlet only when the  
engine is running and remove the  
accessory plug after use. Using  
the accessory plug for prolonged  
periods of time with the engine  
off could cause the battery to dis-  
charge.  
• If you use an electric device with  
a battery, electric current may  
flow from the electric device into  
the vehicle and may cause a mal-  
function of electric systems. Only  
use electric devices which could  
prevent flowing of current into the  
vehicle.  
• Do not use an electric accessory  
or equipment the power con-  
sumption of which is greater than  
12V (10A). It may cause damage  
to the power outlet or vehicle  
wiring harness.  
OJD042141  
®
Aux, USB and iPod  
You can use an aux port to connect audio  
devices and an USB port to plug in an  
USB and also an iPod® port to plug in an  
iPod.  
• Only use 12V electric accessories  
which are less than 10A in elec-  
tric capacity.  
WARNING  
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-  
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet  
and do not touch with a wet hand.  
You may get electrocuted or fire  
may occur.  
• Adjust the air-conditioner or  
heater to the lowest operating  
level when using the power outlet.  
✽
NOTICE  
When using a portable audio device  
connected to the power outlet, noise may  
occur during playback. If this happens,  
use the power source of the portable  
audio device.  
• Close the cover when not in use.  
• Some electronic devices can  
cause electronic interference  
when plugged into a vehicle’s  
power outlet. These devices may  
cause excessive audio static and  
malfunctions in other electronic  
systems or devices used in your  
vehicle.  
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
(Continued)  
4 160  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 161  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
■ Type B  
WARNING  
The following must be observed  
when installing ANY floor mat to  
the vehicle.  
• Ensure that the floor mats are  
securely attached to the vehicle’s  
floor mat anchor(s) before driving  
the vehicle.  
• Do not use ANY floor mat that  
cannot be firmly attached to the  
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.  
OED040354  
OGDE041219  
• Do not stack floor mats on top of  
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-  
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor  
mat). Only a single floor mat  
should be installed in each posi-  
tion.  
Clothes hanger  
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)  
When using a floor mat on the front floor  
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor  
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps  
the floor mat from sliding forward.  
CAUTION  
• Do not hang heavy clothes, since  
those may damage the hook.  
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was  
manufactured with driver’s side  
floor mat anchors that are  
designed to securely hold the  
floor mat in place. To avoid any  
interference with pedal operation,  
Kia recommends that the Kia  
floor mat designed for use in your  
vehicle be installed.  
• Be careful when opening and clos-  
ing the doors. Clothes, etc. may  
get caught between the door gap.  
4 161  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 162  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
Luggage net (holder)  
(if equipped)  
To keep items from shifting in the cargo  
area, you can use the four holders locat-  
ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-  
gage net.  
This symbol indicates the  
position of the front holders  
(wagon).  
OJD042152  
■ Type B (for wagon)  
• Front  
If necessary, we recommend that you  
contact an authorized Kia dealer.  
OJD042150  
Cargo area cover  
(3 Door and 5 Door)  
CAUTION  
Use the cover to hide items stored in the  
cargo area.  
To prevent damage to the goods or  
the vehicle, care should be taken  
when carrying fragile or bulky  
objects in the luggage compartment.  
The cargo area cover will be lifted when  
the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the  
strap (1) from holder if you want to return  
the cover to original position. To remove  
the cargo area cover completely, lift the  
cover to a 43-degree angle and pull it out  
to the full (2). For installation of the cover,  
reverse the removal procedure.  
OJD043051  
• Rear  
WARNING  
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-  
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS  
keep your face and body out of the  
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT  
use the luggage net when the strap  
has visible signs of wear or damage.  
OJD043502-1  
4 162  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:32 PM Page 163  
Features of your vehicle  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
• When you return the cargo area  
cover to its original position, hold  
the cover and lower it.  
• Do not place objects on the cargo  
area cover while driving. Such  
objects may be thrown about  
inside the vehicle and possibly  
injure vehicle occupants during  
an accident or when braking.  
• Do not operate the vehicle with  
the cover removed. It may dam-  
age to the cover.  
• The cargo area cover may be lift-  
ed when the tailgate is opened.  
Ensure that the luggage on the  
cover is moved to a safe place.  
• Never allow anyone to ride in the  
luggage compartment. It is  
designed for luggage only.  
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-  
cle and locate the weight as far  
forward as possible.  
OGDE042299  
Barrier net (wagon) (if equipped)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a barrier net.  
• Since the cargo area cover may be  
damaged or malformed, do not  
apply excessive force to the cover  
or do not put the heavy loads on it.  
When you load some cargoes on the rear  
seat or rear cargo area, you must install  
the barrier net behind front seatback or  
rear seatback.  
It is designed to help protect the heads of  
the occupants by obstructing objects fly-  
ing forward in frontal collisions.  
There are eight hook holders on both  
side of the headliner over the headrests  
for upper side fixation and on the floor  
behind the front seats or rear seats for  
lower side fixation.  
4 163  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 164  
Features of your vehicle  
This symbol indicates the  
position of the hook holders  
on the floor behind the rear  
seat.  
OJD032057  
OJD043500  
To install the barrier net  
1. Open the cover (if equipped) for the  
holder position (1) or (2) you want to  
install.  
2. Compress the one side net upper shaft  
to length direction before insert the net  
upper shaft into the large hole (3) and  
then secure by sliding into the small  
hole (4).  
OGDE042302  
3. Hang the net strap hooks in the corre-  
sponding hook holders on the floor  
behind the front seat or rear seat.  
4 164  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 165  
Features of your vehicle  
To remove the barrier net  
WARNING  
1. Loosen the straps by using the strap  
adjusters and remove the strap hooks  
from the hook holders.  
• Do not put passengers in the rear  
seat or cargo area behind the bar-  
rier net.  
2. Remove the net upper shaft by pulling  
it through the large holes.  
3. Remove the barrier net.  
• Do not put passenger in the rear  
centre seat when the barrier net  
is installed behind the rear seats.  
The barrier net may interfere with  
use of the rear centre safety belt.  
• Do not load cargo in the area  
higher than the barrier net's  
upper end.  
OGDE042303  
4. Fasten the straps, by using the  
adjuster (1).  
• Do not load heavy cargo in the  
area higher than the seatback to  
avoid accident even if the barrier  
net is installed.  
WARNING  
• Do not load cargo which has  
sharp edge that can pass through  
the barrier net.  
• Make sure that there is no slack  
in the barrier net by fastening the  
strap securely when installing the  
net. The strap should be fastened  
after confirming that the hook is  
inserted into the upper hook  
holder securely.  
• Do not apply excessive force to  
the barrier net by hanging on to  
the net or by suspending heavy  
cargo and so on.  
• Make sure that the seatbacks are  
locked securely.  
4 165  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 166  
Features of your vehicle  
When the cargo security screen is not in  
use:  
1. Pull the cargo security screen rear and  
down to release it from the guides.  
2. The cargo security screen will auto-  
matically slide back in.  
✽
NOTICE  
The cargo security screen may not auto-  
matically slide back in if the cargo secu-  
rity screen is not fully pulled out. Fully  
pull it out and then let go.  
OGDE042304  
OGDE042305  
To use the cargo security screen  
Cargo security screen (wagon)  
(if equipped)  
1. Pull the cargo security screen towards  
the rear of the vehicle by the handle  
(1).  
Use the cargo security screen to hide  
items stored in the cargo area.  
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide (2).  
✽
NOTICE  
Pull out the cargo security screen with  
the handle in the center to prevent the  
guide pin from falling out of the guide.  
4 166  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 167  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING  
• Do not place objects on the cargo  
security screen. Such objects  
may be thrown about inside the  
vehicle and possibly injure vehi-  
cle occupants during an accident  
or when braking.  
• Never allow anyone to ride in the  
luggage compartment. It is  
designed for luggage only.  
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-  
cle and locate the weight as for-  
ward as possible.  
OGDE042306  
OGDE042307  
To remove the cargo security screen  
1. Push the guide pin inward.  
Luggage rail system (wagon)  
(if equipped)  
2. While pushing the guide pin, pull out  
the cargo security screen.  
The luggage rail system may prevent the  
luggage from sliding around in the lug-  
gage compartment.  
CAUTION  
Since the cargo security screen  
may be damaged or malformed, do  
not put luggage on it when it is  
used.  
4 167  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 168  
Features of your vehicle  
Build in segmentation bar  
• Put both pillars (A) from the segmenta-  
tion bar in the openings from the rail.  
• To move the segmentation bar, put  
your hand on the side of the pillar and  
push down the lever arm (B).  
• Make sure the pillars click into place.  
• To release the belt, turn the upper ele-  
ment (C) to the left or right until it  
clicks.  
• Now you can pull the belt (D) and  
secure your luggage by putting the belt  
around the luggage and put the hook  
(E) into the middle of the segmentation  
bar (F).  
OGDE042308  
OJD042151  
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may  
differ from the illustration.  
Applying the shackle on the guide rail  
• Put the shackle (A) in the position  
where the shackle is put in the rail.  
• For bulky luggage, you can hook both  
hooks into each other.  
• To move the shackle, press the button  
(1) and move the shackle along the rail.  
Shopping bag holder  
CAUTION  
• To make sure the belt locks, put the  
upper element (C) back into the lock  
position (1).  
• Make sure the shackle is clicked into  
place.  
• Do not hang a bag weighing more  
than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause  
damage to the shopping bag  
holder.  
• To fix the luggage, pull up the hook (2)  
in the middle cargo bay.  
CAUTION  
• Now you can mount e.g. belt to fix the  
luggage in the hook.  
• The segmentation bar must be  
mounted and demounted with  
both pillars simultaneously.  
• Do not hang the frail objects  
when you drive rough road, the  
objects may be damaged.  
• The shackle cannot be used in the  
position where the shackle is put in and  
out of the rail (3).  
• Max. load: 30 kg with one belt  
40 kg with two belts  
CAUTION  
Tensile force : max. 30 kgf. for  
1 shackle  
4 168  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 169  
Features of your vehicle  
EXTERIOR FEATURES  
✽
NOTICE  
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,  
be sure not to position cargo onto the  
roof in such a way that it could interfere  
with sunroof operation.  
CAUTION  
• When carrying cargo on the roof,  
take the necessary precautions to  
make sure the cargo does not  
damage the roof of the vehicle.  
• When carrying large objects on  
the roof, make sure they do not  
exceed the overall roof length or  
width.  
OED046090  
OED046091  
2. Rotate the cover half way and insert  
the cover on the roof hole as the illus-  
tration.  
Mounting bracket for roof carrier  
(if equipped)  
To install or remove a roof carrier, you  
can use the mounting bracket and cover  
on the roof.  
✽
NOTICE  
To prevent loosing the roof carrier  
cover, install the cover on the roof before  
you install the roof carrier.  
When you install a roof carrier, use the  
following procedure.  
1. Insert a slim tool(coin or flat blade driv-  
er) into the slot and slide the cover  
toward the arrow on the cover.  
3. After using the roof carrier, install the  
cover back on the roof in the reverse  
order.  
WARNING  
Use a coin or flat blade driver when  
you remove the roof carrier cover.  
If you use your fingernail, it may  
damage your fingernail.  
4 169  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 170  
Features of your vehicle  
WARNING  
✽
NOTICE  
• The crossbars (if equipped) should be  
placed in the proper load carrying  
positions prior to placing items onto  
the roof rack.  
• If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-  
roof, be sure not to position cargo onto  
the roof rack in such a way that it could  
interfere with sunroof operation.  
• The vehicle center of gravity will  
be higher when items are loaded  
onto the roof. Avoid sudden  
starts, braking, sharp turns,  
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds  
that may result in loss of vehicle  
control or rollover resulting in an  
accident.  
• When the roof rack is not being used to  
carry cargo, the crossbars may need to  
be repositioned if wind noise is detected.  
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-  
ners carefully when carrying  
items on the roof. Severe wind  
updrafts, caused by passing  
vehicles or natural causes, can  
cause sudden upward pressure  
on items loaded on the roof. This  
is especially true when carrying  
large, flat items such as wood  
panels or mattresses. This could  
cause the items to fall off the roof  
and cause damage to your vehi-  
cle or others around you.  
OJD042245  
Roof rack (for wagon)  
CAUTION  
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can  
load cargo on top of your vehicle.  
• When carrying cargo on the roof  
rack, take the necessary precau-  
tions to make sure the cargo does  
not damage the roof of the vehicle.  
We recommend to obtain the crossbars  
and fixing components needed to install  
the roof rack on your vehicle from an  
authorized Kia dealer.  
• When carrying large objects on  
the roof rack, make sure they do  
not exceed the overall roof length  
or width.  
• To prevent damage or loss of  
cargo while driving, check fre-  
quently before or while driving to  
make sure the items on the roof  
are securely fastened.  
• When you are carrying cargo on  
the roof rack, do not operate the  
sunroof (if equipped).  
4 170  
JD eng 4a.QXP 3/4/2015 4:33 PM Page 171  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
WARNING  
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-  
ners carefully when carrying  
items on the roof rack. Severe  
wind updrafts, caused by passing  
vehicles or natural causes, can  
cause sudden upward pressure  
on items loaded on the roof rack.  
This is especially true when car-  
rying large, flat items such as  
wood panels or mattresses. This  
could cause the items to fall off  
the roof rack and cause damage  
to your vehicle or others around  
you.  
• The following specification is the  
maximum weight that can be  
loaded onto the roof rack.  
Distribute the load as evenly as  
possible across the crossbars (if  
equipped) and roof rack and  
secure the load firmly.  
ROOF  
RACK  
100 kg (220 lbs.)  
EVENLY DISTRIBUTED  
Loading cargo or luggage in  
excess of the specified weight  
limit on the roof rack may dam-  
age your vehicle.  
• To prevent damage or loss of  
cargo while driving, check fre-  
quently before or while driving to  
make sure the items on the roof  
rack are securely fastened.  
• The vehicle center of gravity will  
be higher when items are loaded  
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden  
starts, braking, sharp turns,  
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds  
that may result in loss of vehicle  
control or rollover resulting in an  
accident.  
(Continued)  
4 171  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 172  
Features of your vehicle  
AUDIO SYSTEM  
✽
NOTICE  
CAUTION  
• If you install an aftermarket HID  
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and  
electronic device may malfunction.  
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,  
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,  
and air freshener from contacting the  
interior parts because they may cause  
damage or discoloration.  
• Before entering a place with a low  
height clearance or a car wash,  
remove the antenna by rotating it  
counterclockwise. If not, the  
antenna may be damaged.  
• When reinstalling your antenna, it  
is important that it is fully tight-  
ened and adjusted to the upright  
position to ensure proper recep-  
tion. But it could be removed  
when parking the vehicle or when  
loading cargo on the roof rack.  
OHM048154N  
Antenna  
• When cargo is loaded on the roof  
rack, do not place the cargo near  
the antenna pole to ensure proper  
reception.  
Roof antenna  
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive  
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This  
antenna is a removable type. To remove  
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To  
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.  
4 172  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 173  
Features of your vehicle  
■ Type A  
RADIO mode  
It will function as the PRESET STATION  
select buttons.  
VOL (+ / -) (1)  
• Push up the lever to increase volume.  
• Push down the lever to decrease vol-  
ume.  
CDP mode  
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN  
button.  
SEEK (  
/
) (2)  
The SEEK/PRESET button has different  
functions base on the system mode. For  
the following functions the button should  
be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.  
Detailed information for audio control  
buttons are described in the following  
pages in this section.  
OJD042147  
■ Type B  
RADIO mode  
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select  
button.  
MUTE (3)  
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the  
sound.  
• Press the MUTE button again to acti-  
vate the sound.  
CDP mode  
It will function as the FF/REW button.  
MODE (4)  
Press the button to select Radio or CD  
(compact disc).  
If the SEEK button is pressed for less  
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in  
each mode.  
OJD042149  
Audio remote control  
(if equipped)  
The steering wheel audio remote control  
button is installed to promote safe driving.  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the audio remote  
control buttons simultaneously.  
4 173  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 174  
Features of your vehicle  
FM reception  
AM reception  
FM radio station  
JBM001  
JBM002  
JBM003  
AM broadcasts can be received at  
greater distances than FM broadcasts.  
This is because AM radio waves are  
transmitted at low frequencies. These  
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-  
low the curvature of the earth rather than  
travelling straight out into the atmos-  
phere. In addition, they curve around  
obstructions so that they can provide bet-  
ter signal coverage.  
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high  
frequencies and do not bend to follow the  
earth's surface. Because of this, FM  
broadcasts generally begin to fade at  
short distances from the station. Also,  
FM signals are easily affected by build-  
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.  
These can result in certain listening con-  
ditions which might lead you to believe a  
problem exists with your radio. The fol-  
lowing conditions are normal and do not  
indicate radio trouble:  
How car audio works  
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast  
from transmitter towers located around your  
city.They are intercepted by the radio anten-  
na on your car. This signal is then received  
by the radio and sent to your car speakers.  
When a strong radio signal has reached  
your vehicle, the precise engineering of  
your audio system ensures the best pos-  
sible quality reproduction. However, in  
some cases the signal coming to your  
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This  
can be due to factors such as the dis-  
tance from the radio station, closeness of  
other strong radio stations or the pres-  
ence of buildings, bridges or other large  
obstructions in the area.  
4 174  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 175  
Features of your vehicle  
Using a cellular phone or a two-way  
radio  
When a cellular phone is used inside the  
vehicle, noise may be produced from the  
audio equipment. This does not mean  
that something is wrong with the audio  
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-  
lar phone at a place as far as possible  
from the audio equipment.  
CAUTION  
When using a communication sys-  
tem such a cellular phone or a radio  
set inside the vehicle, a separate  
external antenna must be fitted.  
When a cellular phone or a radio set  
is used with an internal antenna  
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-  
cle's electrical system and adverse-  
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-  
cle.  
JBM004  
JBM005  
• Fading - As your car moves away from  
the radio station, the signal will weaken  
and sound will begin to fade. When this  
occurs, we suggest that you select  
another stronger station.  
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal  
weakens, another more powerful sig-  
nal near the same frequency may  
begin to play. This is because your  
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-  
est signal. If this occurs, select another  
station with a stronger signal.  
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or  
large obstructions between the trans-  
mitter and your radio can disturb the  
signal causing static or fluttering nois-  
es to occur. Reducing the treble level  
may lessen this effect until the distur-  
bance clears.  
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals  
being received from several directions  
can cause distortion or fluttering. This  
can be caused by a direct and reflect-  
ed signal from the same station, or by  
signals from two stations with close  
frequencies. If this occurs, select  
another station until the condition has  
passed.  
WARNING  
Don't use a cellular phone when  
you are driving. You must stop at a  
safe place to use a cellular phone.  
4 175  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 176  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
• Do not touch the antenna during  
thunder or lightening as such  
acts may lead to lightning  
induced electric shock.  
• Operating the device while driv-  
ing could lead to accidents due to  
a lack of attention to external sur-  
roundings. First park the vehicle  
before operating the device.  
• Do not stare at the screen while  
driving. Staring at the screen for  
prolonged periods of time could  
lead to traffic accidents.  
• Do not stop or park in parking-  
restricted areas to operate the  
product. Such acts could lead to  
traffic accidents.  
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or  
modify the audio system. Such  
acts could result in accidents,  
fire, or electric shock.  
• Adjust the volume to levels that  
allow the driver to hear sounds  
from outside of the vehicle.  
Driving in a state where external  
sounds cannot be heard may lead  
to accidents.  
• Use the system with the vehicle  
ignition turned on. Prolonged use  
with the ignition turned off could  
result in battery discharge.  
• Using the phone while driving may  
lead to a lack of attention of traffic  
conditions and increase the likeli-  
hood of accidents.  
phone feature after parking the  
vehicle.  
• Pay attention to the volume set-  
ting when turning the device on.  
A sudden output of extreme vol-  
ume upon turning the device on  
could lead to hearing impairment.  
(Adjust the volume to a suitable  
levels before turning off the  
device.)  
Use  
the  
• Heed caution not to spill water or  
introduce foreign objects into the  
device. Such acts could lead to  
smoke, fire, or product malfunc-  
tion.  
• If you want to change the position  
of device installation, please  
inquire with your place of pur-  
chase or service maintenance  
center. Technical expertise is  
required to install or disassemble  
the device.  
• Please refrain from use if the  
screen is blank or no sound can  
be heard as these signs may indi-  
cate product malfunction.  
Continued use in such conditions  
could lead to accidents(fires,  
electric shock) or product mal-  
functions.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
4 176  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 177  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Turn on the car ignition before  
using this device. Do not operate  
the audio system for long periods  
of time with the ignition turned off  
as such operations may lead to  
battery discharge.  
• In case of product malfunction,  
please contact your place of pur-  
chase or After Service center.  
• Placing the audio system within  
an electromagnetic environment  
may result in noise interference.  
• Do not subject the device to  
severe shock or impact. Direct  
pressure onto the front side of  
the monitor may cause damage to  
the LCD or touch screen.  
• When cleaning the device, make  
sure to turn off the device and  
use a dry and smooth cloth.  
Never use tough materials, chem-  
ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,  
benzene, thinners, etc.) as such  
materials may damage the device  
panel or cause color/quality dete-  
rioration  
• Do not place beverages close to  
the audio system. Spilling bever-  
ages may lead to system mal-  
function.  
(Continued)  
4 177  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 178  
Features of your vehicle  
2. Folder playing order :  
❋ If no song file is contained in the fold-  
er, that folder is not displayed.  
Caring for disc  
✽
NOTICE - Playing an  
Incompatible Copy  
Protected Audio CD  
• If the temperature inside the car is too  
high, open the car windows to ventilate  
before using the system.  
Some copy protected CDs, which do not  
comply with international audio CD  
standards (Red Book), may not play on  
your car audio. Please note that inabili-  
ties to properly play a copy protected  
CD may indicate that the CD is defec-  
tive, not the CD player.  
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA  
files without permission. Use CDs that  
are created only by lawful means.  
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as  
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners  
and magnetic sprays made for ana-  
logue disc onto CDs.  
• To prevent the disc surface from get-  
ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges  
or the center hole only.  
✽
NOTICE  
Order of playing files (folders) :  
1. Song playing order :  
tially.  
to  
sequen-  
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of  
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from  
the center to the outside edge).  
• Do not damage the disc surface or  
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.  
• Make certain only CDs are inserted  
into the CD player (Do not insert more  
than one CD at a time).  
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to  
protect them from scratches or dirt.  
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-  
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate  
normally according to manufacturing  
companies or making and recording  
methods. In such circumstances, con-  
tinued use may cause malfunctions to  
your audio system.  
4 178  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 179  
Features of your vehicle  
• Depending on the condition of the  
• Depending on the type and capacity of  
the external USB device or the type of  
the files stored in the device, there is a  
difference in the time taken for recogni-  
tion of the device.  
Using Your USB Device  
external USB device, the connected  
external USB device can be unrec-  
ognizable.  
• To use an external USB device,  
make sure the device is not connect-  
ed when starting up the vehicle.  
Connect the device after starting up.  
• When the formatted byte/sector set-  
ting of External USB device is not  
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then  
the device will not be recognized.  
• Do not use the USB device for purposes  
other than playing music files.  
• If you start the engine when the USB  
device is connected, it may damage  
the USB device. (USB flashdrives  
are very sensitive to electric shock.)  
• Playing videos through the USB is not  
supported.  
• Use only a USB device formatted to  
FAT 12/16/32.  
• Use of USB accessories such as  
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F  
may lower performance or cause  
trouble.  
• If the engine is started up or turned  
off while the external USB device is  
connected, the external USB device  
may not work.  
• USB devices without USB I/F authen-  
tication may not be recognizable.  
• Make sure the USB connection termi-  
nal does not come in contact with the  
human body or other objects.  
• If you use devices such as a USB  
hub purchased separately, the vehi-  
cle’s audio system may not recog-  
nize the USB device. In that case,  
connect the USB device directly to  
the multimedia terminal of the vehi-  
cle.  
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or  
WMA files.  
1) It can only play MP3 files with the  
• If you repeatedly connect or discon-  
nect the USB device in a short peri-  
od of time, it may break the device.  
compression  
8Kbps~320Kbps.  
rate  
between  
• You may hear a strange noise when  
connecting or disconnecting a USB  
device.  
2) It can only play WMA music files  
with the compression rate  
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.  
• If the USB device is divided by logi-  
cal drives, only the music files on the  
highest-priority drive are recognized  
by car audio.  
• If you disconnect the external USB  
device during playback in USB mode,  
the external USB device can be dam-  
aged or may malfunction. Therefore,  
disconnect the external USB device  
when the audio is turned off or in  
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)  
• Take precautions for static electricity  
when connecting or disconnecting the  
external USB device.  
• Devices such as MP3 Player/  
Cellular phone/Digital camera can be  
unrecognizable by standard USB I/F  
can be unrecognizable.  
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not  
recognizable.  
(Continued)  
4 179  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 180  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
NOTICE - USB Jack Damage  
(Continued)  
• Charging through the USB may not  
be supported in some mobile  
devices.  
• The data in the USB memory may be  
lost while using this audio.  
Always back up important data on a  
personal storage device.  
• Please avoid using USB memory prod-  
ucts which can be used as key chains  
or cellular phone accessories as they  
could cause damage to the USB jack.  
Please make certain only to use plug  
type connector products as shown  
below.  
• USB HDD or USB types that liable to  
connection failures due to vehicle  
vibrations are not supported. (i-stick  
type)  
• Some non-standard USB devices  
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be  
unrecognizable.  
• Some USB flash memory readers  
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or  
external-HDD type devices can be  
unrecognizable.  
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-  
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are  
not recognizable.  
4 180  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 181  
Features of your vehicle  
■ CD Player : AC110A2EE/AC100A2EE  
❋No  
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.  
4 181  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/12/2015 3:03 PM Page 182  
Features of your vehicle  
When the pop up screen is displayed,  
1
use the  
6
TUNE knob or keys  
to select the desired mode.  
~
MEDIA  
(3)  
Changes to CD, USB MP3, iPod, BT  
MP3, AUX modes.  
Each time the key is pressed, the mode  
is changed in order of CD, USB, iPod,  
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.  
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop up  
screen will be displayed when [Mode  
On  
Pop up] is turned  
.
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND  
FUNCTIONS  
(6)  
/
knob  
Power Knob: Turns power On/Off by  
When the pop up screen is displayed,  
1
use the  
5
TUNE knob or keys  
to select the desired mode.  
~
pressing the knob  
Volume Knob: Sets volume by turning  
the knob left/right  
❈ Display and settings may differ  
depending on the selected audio.  
PHONE  
(4)  
Operates Phone Screen  
FM  
(7)  
Changes to FM mode.  
Audio Head Unit  
❈ When a phone is not connected, the  
connection screen is displayed.  
(1) (EJECT)  
Ejects the disc.  
Each time the key is pressed, the mode is  
changed in order of FM1  
SEEK  
TRACK  
➟
FM2  
➟
FMA.  
(5)  
,
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for  
broadcast frequencies.  
RADIO  
(2)  
Changes to FM/AM mode.  
AM  
(8)  
Changes to AM mode.  
CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes  
Each time the key is pressed,the mode is  
changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA  
➟ AM ➟ AMA.  
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds):  
Moves to next or previous song (file)  
Each time the key is pressed, the mode  
is changed in order of AM ➟ AMA.  
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds):  
Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.  
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up  
screen will be displayed when [Mode  
Pop up] is turned  
.
On  
4 182  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 183  
Features of your vehicle  
SETUP  
(14)  
Press the  
(11)  
Each time the button is pressed sets  
screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen Off  
SETUP  
key : Moves to the  
Display, Sound, Phone(Option), System  
setting modes  
❈ Audio operation is maintained and  
only the screen will be turned Off.  
In the screen Off state, press any key  
to turn the screen On again.  
TA/SCAN  
(12)  
Radio Mode  
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-  
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5  
seconds each  
❈ If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
feature is supported  
1
6
(9)  
(Preset)  
~
CD, USB, iPod mode  
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-  
nels) or receives saved frequencies  
(channels)  
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-  
onds): Previews each song (file) for 10  
seconds each  
CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode  
TA/SCAN  
❈ Press the  
key (over 0.8  
RPT  
1
-
-
: Repeat  
: Random  
seconds) again to continue listening to  
the current song (file).  
RDM  
2
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu  
pop up screen, the number menu is  
selected.  
(15)  
TUNE knob  
MEMU  
(13)  
Displays menus for the current mode.  
Radio mode : Changes frequency by  
turning the knob left/right  
PTY  
FOLDER  
(10)  
,
CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches songs  
(files) by turning the knob left/right  
❈ When the desired song is displayed,  
MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search  
FM : RDS Program Type Search  
press the knob to play the song.  
Moves focus in all selection menus and  
selects menus  
4 183  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 184  
Features of your vehicle  
Mode Pop up  
DISPLAY SETTINGS  
SOUND SETTINGS  
On  
[Mode Pop up] Changes  
selection mode  
SETUP  
Press the  
through  
key Select [Sound]  
RDM  
2
TUNE knob or  
key  
RADIO  
• During On state, press the  
MEDIA  
or  
key to display the mode  
Select menu through  
TUNE knob  
change pop up screen.  
Scroll Text  
SETUP  
Press the  
through  
key Select [Display]  
On  
Off  
[Scroll Text] Set  
/
RPT  
1
TUNE knob or  
key  
On  
•
•
: Maintains scroll  
: Scrolls only one (1) time.  
Select menu through  
TUNE knob  
Off  
Song Info  
When playing an MP3 file, select the  
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or  
‘Album/Artist/Song’.  
4 184  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 185  
Features of your vehicle  
Audio Settings  
Power Bass  
Volume Dialogue  
This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,  
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and  
Balance.  
This is a sound system feature that pro-  
vides live bass.  
Adjusts voice recognition volume.  
Select [Volume Dialogue] Set vol-  
ume of  
On  
Off  
Select [Power Bass] Set  
through TUNE knob  
/
TUNE knob  
Select [Audio Settings] Select menu  
through TUNE knob Turn  
TUNE knob left/right to set  
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound  
tone.  
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader  
and balance.  
• Default : Restores default settings.  
Speed Dependent Volume Control  
❈ Return : While adjusting values, re-  
pressing the TUNE knob will  
restore the parent menu.  
This feature is used to automatically con-  
trol the volume level according to the  
speed of the vehicle.  
Select [SDVC] Set in 4 levels [Off/  
Low/Mid/High] of  
TUNE knob  
4 185  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 186  
Features of your vehicle  
❈ It is possible to pair up to five  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
enabled mobile phones.  
Pair Phone  
®
To pair a Bluetooth Wireless Technology  
enabled mobile phone, authentication  
and connection processes are first  
required. As a result, you cannot pair  
your mobile phone while driving the vehi-  
cle. First park your vehicle before use.  
PHONE SETUP (if equipped)  
SETUP  
Press the  
key Select [Phone]  
3
through  
TUNE knob or  
key  
Select menu through  
TUNE knob  
Select [Pair Phone] Set through TUNE  
knob  
➀ Search for device names as displayed  
on your mobile phone and connect.  
➁ Input the passkey displayed on the  
screen. (Passkey : 0000)  
❈ The device name and passkey will be  
displayed on the screen for up to 3  
minutes. If pairing is not completed  
within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone  
pairing process will automatically be  
canceled.  
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.  
❈ In some mobile phones, pairing will  
automatically be followed by connection.  
4 186  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 187  
Features of your vehicle  
Changing connection sequence  
(Priority)  
Phone List  
➂ Connection completion is displayed.  
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-  
connect the currently connected  
phone and select a new phone to con-  
nect.  
The names of up to 5 paired phones will  
be displayed.  
This is used to change the order (priori-  
ty) of automatic connection for the paired  
mobile phones.  
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently  
connected phone.  
Select [Phone List] Select mobile  
Disconnecting a connected phone  
phone through  
[Priority]  
TUNE knob Select  
Select [Phone List] Select mobile  
phone through  
TUNE knob Select  
[Disconnect Phone]  
➀ Select [ Phone] in the [Setup]  
➁ Select [Phone List]  
➂ From the paired phones, select the  
➀ Select the currently connected mobile  
phone.  
Select the desired name to setup the  
selected phone.  
phone desired for No.1 priority.  
Select [  
Priority]  
Connecting a phone  
❈ Once the connection sequence (priori-  
ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority  
mobile phone will be connected.  
Select [Phone List] Select mobile  
phone through  
TUNE knob Select  
[Connect Phone]  
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be con-  
nected: Automatically attempts to con-  
nect the most recently connected  
phone.  
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile  
phone.  
➂ Disconnection completion is dis-  
played.  
- Cases when the most recently con-  
nected phone cannot be connected:  
Attempts to connect in the order in  
which paired phones are listed.  
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not cur-  
rently connected.  
➁ Connect the selected mobile phone.  
4 187  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 188  
Features of your vehicle  
Delete  
Phone book Download  
Audio Streaming  
Songs (files) saved in your Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology enabled mobile phone  
can be played through the audio system.  
Select [Phone List] Select mobile  
This feature is used to download a phone  
book and call histories into the audio sys-  
tem.  
phone through  
[Delete]  
TUNE knob Select  
On  
Select [Phone] Select [  
[
History] Select [Audio Streaming] Set  
Off  
/
P.BOOK] through  
TUNE knob  
through  
TUNE knob  
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.  
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.  
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.  
®
•
The download feature may not be support-  
ed in some mobile phones.  
•
The Bluetooth Wireless Technology  
audio streaming feature may not be sup-  
ported in some mobile phones.  
❈ When attempting to delete a currently  
connected phone, the phone is first  
disconnected.  
• If a different operation is performed while  
a phone book is being downloaded,  
downloading will be discontinued. The  
phone book already downloaded will be  
saved.  
Outgoing Volume  
• When you delete a mobile phone, lt's  
phone book will also be erased.  
• For stable Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
communication, delete the mobile phone  
from the audio and also delete the audio  
from your mobile phone  
This is used to set the volume of your  
voice as heard by the other party while  
on a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
enabled handsfree call.  
• When downloading a new phone book,  
delete all previously saved phone book  
before starting download.  
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set vol-  
TUNE knob  
ume through  
Auto Download  
When connecting a mobile phone, it is  
possible to automatically download a  
new phone book and Call Histories.  
On  
Select [Auto Download] Set  
/
Off  
through  
TUNE knob  
4 188  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 189  
Features of your vehicle  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
System Off  
• Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology con-  
nection may become intermittently discon-  
nected in some mobile phones. Follow  
these next steps to try again.  
SETUP  
Technology through the  
Key  
SETUP  
Press the  
through  
key Select [Phone]  
This feature is used when you do not  
wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology system.  
Select [Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
3
TUNE knob or  
key  
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
function within the mobile phone  
ON/OFF and try to connect again.  
➀ A screen asking whether to turn on  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will be  
displayed.  
System Off] Set through  
knob  
TUNE  
2) Turn the mobile phone power ON/OFF and  
try to connect again.  
YES  
➁ On the screen, select  
to turn on  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and  
display guidance.  
3) Completely remove the mobile phone  
battery, reboot, and then try to connect  
again.  
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-  
connect the currently connected phone  
and turn the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology system off.  
❈ If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
system is turned on, the system will  
automatically try to connect the most  
4) Reboot the audio system and try to con-  
nect again  
5) Delete all paired devices in your mobile  
phone and the audio system and pair  
again for use.  
recently  
connected  
Bluetooth®  
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology System  
Wireless Technology mobile phone.  
To use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
when the system is currently off, follow  
these next steps.  
• Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless  
PHONE  
Technology through the  
Key  
PHONE  
Press the  
key Screen Guidance  
❈ Moves to the screen where Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology functions can be  
used and displays guidance.  
4 189  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 190  
Features of your vehicle  
VRS Mode  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
This feature is used to change voice  
command feedback between Normal and  
Expert modes.  
If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
feature is supported  
Select [VRS Mode] Set through  
TUNE knob  
SETUP  
Press the  
key Select [  
4
System] through tune knob or  
key Select menu through  
knob  
• Normal : This mode is for beginner  
users and provides detailed instructions  
during voice command operation.  
TUNE  
Memory Information  
• Expert : This mode is for expert users  
and omits some information during  
voice command operation. (When using  
Expert mode, guidance instructions can  
be heard through the [Help] or [Menu]  
commands.  
If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
feature is not supported  
Displays currently used memory and  
total system memory.  
Select [Memory Information] OK  
The currently used memory is displayed  
on the left side while the total system  
memory is displayed on the right side.  
SETUP  
Press the  
key Select [  
3
System] through tune knob or  
key Select menu through  
knob  
TUNE  
4 190  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:39 PM Page 191  
Features of your vehicle  
Language  
This menu is used to set the display and  
voice recognition language.  
Select [Language] Set through  
knob  
TUNE  
❈ The system will reboot after the lan-  
guage is changed.  
❈ Language support by region  
-
4 191  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 192  
Features of your vehicle  
SEEK  
SCAN  
RADIO  
Changing RADIO mode  
RADIO  
FM  
AM  
Press the  
SEEK  
(
TRACK  
,
)key  
RADIO  
FM  
AM  
Press the  
TA/SCAN  
(
,
) key  
,
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8  
seconds): Changes the frequency.  
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8  
seconds): The broadcast frequency  
increases and previews each broadcast  
for 5 seconds each. After scanning all  
frequencies, returns and plays the cur-  
rent broadcast frequency.  
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8  
seconds): Automatically searches for  
the next frequency.  
RADIO  
FM  
AM  
Press the  
to change the mode in order  
(
,
)key Preset SEEK  
Selecting through manual search  
RADIO  
FM  
AM  
Press the  
(
,
) key  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust  
the frequency.  
RADIO  
: FM1➟FM2  
: FM1 FM2 ➟FMA  
: AM AMA  
➟
FMA  
➟
AM ➟AMA  
1
6
~
FM  
AM  
➟
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8  
seconds): Plays the frequency saved in  
the corresponding key.  
➟
- FM : Changes by 50KHz  
- AM : Changes by 9khz  
•
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays the  
change radio mode pop up screen.  
While the pop up screen is displayed, you  
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8  
seconds): Pressing and holding the  
1
6
desired key from  
~
will  
can change the radio mode through the  
1
5
save the currently playing broadcast to  
the selected key and sound a BEEP.  
tune knob or  
~
keys.  
Adjust Volume  
Turn the  
the volume.  
VOL knob left/right to adjust  
4 192  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 193  
Features of your vehicle  
Traffic Announcement (TA)  
AST (Auto Store)  
News  
TA/SCAN  
Shortly pressing the  
(under 0.8 seconds): Set  
Traffic Announcement) mode.  
key  
TA  
MENU  
MENU  
Press the  
through  
key Set [ AST] Press the  
key Set [ News]  
On  
Off  
/
RPT  
1
4
TUNE knob or  
key.  
through  
TUNE knob or  
key.  
The News option can be turned On/Off.  
Select AST (Auto Store) to save fre-  
quencies with superior reception to  
PTY Up/Down  
1
6
presets  
~
. If no frequencies Info Volume  
PTY  
FOLDER  
• Press the  
,
key  
are received, then the most recently  
received frequency will be broadcast.  
Info Volume refers to the sound volume  
upon receiving News or Traffic information.  
The info volume can be controlled by  
turning the VOL knob left/right while a  
news or traffic broadcast is playing.  
when searching PTY in RDS  
Broadcasting Program Type selection.  
❈ Saves only to the Preset memory  
6
1
~
of FMA or AMA mode.  
MENU  
Within  
Region and News functions.  
MENU  
key are the AST, AF,  
❈ AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio  
menus.  
AF (Alternative Frequency)  
MENU  
Press the  
through  
key Set [ AF]  
RDM  
2
TUNE knob or  
key.  
The Alternative Frequency option can be  
turned On/Off.  
Region  
Press the  
through  
MENU  
key Set [ Region]  
3
TUNE knob or  
key.  
The Region option can be turned On/Off.  
4 193  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 194  
Features of your vehicle  
Song Infomation  
Random  
BASIC METHOD OF USE :  
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /  
iPod / My Music  
RDM  
SETUP  
2
Press the  
through the  
key Select [ Display] While song (file) is playing  
RPT  
1
TUNE knob or  
key  
(RDM) key  
Select [Song Info] Media Display  
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on  
screen  
MEDIA  
Press the  
key to change the  
• [Song Info] : The screen display info  
can be changed to Album/Artist/Song  
name.  
mode in order of CD➟USB(iPod)➟AUX  
➟My Music➟BT Audio.  
• Random (Shortly pressing the key  
(under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all songs in  
random order.  
The folder/file name is displayed on the  
screen.  
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on  
screen  
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing the  
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files  
within the current folder in random  
order.  
iPod mode: ALB RDM on screen  
Repeat  
• Album Random (Shortly pressing the  
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files  
within albums of the current category in  
random order.  
RPT  
1
While song (file) is playing  
(RPT) key  
❈ The CD is automatically played when  
a CD is inserted.  
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My Music  
mode: RPT on screen  
❈ The USB music is automatically  
played when a USB is connected.  
MP3 CD, USB, iPod mode: ALL RDM on  
screen  
• All Random (pressing and holding the  
key (over 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files in  
random order.  
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing  
the key (under 0.8 seconds)): Repeats  
the current song.  
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on  
screen  
RDM  
2
❈ Press the  
repeat.  
key again to turn off  
• To repeat folder (Pressing and holding  
the key (over 0.8 seconds)): repeats all  
files within the current folder.  
RPT  
1
❈ Press the  
key again to turn off  
repeat.  
4 194  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 195  
Features of your vehicle  
Changing Song/File  
Scan  
Searching Songs (File)  
• Turning  
songs (files)  
TUNE knob : Searches for  
TA/SCAN  
TRACK  
While song (file) is playing  
key  
While song (file) is playing  
key  
• Pressing  
ed song (file).  
TUNE knob : Plays select-  
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8  
seconds): Plays the current song from  
the beginning.  
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8  
seconds) : Scans all songs for 10 sec-  
onds starting from the next song.  
TA/SCAN  
TRACK  
❈ If the  
key is pressed again  
❈ Press the  
key again to turn  
within 1 second, the previous song is  
played.  
off.  
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in  
iPod mode.  
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8  
seconds): Rewinds the song.  
SEEK  
While song (file) is playing  
key  
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB  
Mode  
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8  
seconds): Plays the next song.  
PTY  
While file is playing  
Up) key  
(Folder  
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8  
seconds): Fast forwards the song.  
• Searches the next folder.  
FOLDER  
While file is playing  
Down) key  
(Folder  
• Searches the parent folder.  
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the  
TUNE knob, the first file within the  
selected folder will be played.  
❈ In iPod mode, moves to the Parent  
Folder.  
4 195  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 196  
Features of your vehicle  
MENU : Audio CD  
Information  
MENU : MP3 CD / USB  
MENU  
MENU  
key to  
Press the CD MP3 mode  
key to  
Press the CD MP3 mode  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ Info]  
3
set the Repeat, Random, Information  
features.  
set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder  
Repeat, All Random, Information, and  
Copy features.  
TUNE knob or  
key to display information of the cur-  
rent song.  
MENU  
❈ Press the  
key to turn off info  
display.  
Repeat  
Repeat  
MENU  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ RPT]  
RPT  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ RPT]  
RPT  
1
1
TUNE knob or  
key to repeat the current song.  
TUNE knob or  
key to repeat the current song.  
RPT  
1
❈ Press the  
key again to turn off.  
Folder Random  
Random  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ F.RDM]  
RDM  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ RDM]  
RDM  
2
TUNE knob or  
key to randomly play songs within the  
current folder.  
2
TUNE knob or  
key to randomly play songs within  
the current folder.  
RDM  
2
❈ Press the  
key again to turn off.  
4 196  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 197  
Features of your vehicle  
Folder Repeat  
Copy  
key Set [ F.RPT] Press the  
MENU : iPod  
MENU  
key to  
MENU  
MENU  
In iPod mode, press the  
Press the  
through the  
key to repeat songs within the cur- key.  
key Set [ Copy]  
6
set the Repeat, Album Random, All  
Random, Information and Search fea-  
tures.  
3
TUNE knob or  
through the  
TUNE knob or  
rent folder.  
• This is used to copy the current song  
into My Music. You can play the copied  
Music in My Music mode.  
All Random  
❈ If another key is pressed while copying  
is in progress, a pop up asking you  
whether to cancel copying is dis-  
played.  
MENU  
Press the  
through the TUNE knob or  
key Set [ A.RDM]  
4
key  
to randomly play all songs within the  
CD.  
❈ If another media is connected or  
inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX) while  
copying is in progress, copying is can-  
celed.  
Repeat  
Information  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ RPT]  
RPT  
1
TUNE knob or  
key to repeat the current song.  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ Info]  
5
❈ Music will not be played while copying  
is in progress.  
TUNE knob or  
key to display information of the cur-  
rent song.  
Album Random  
MENU  
Press the  
key Set [ AlbRDM]  
MENU  
❈ Press the  
display.  
key to turn off info  
RDM  
2
through the  
TUNE knob or  
key.  
Plays albums within the currently playing  
category in random order.  
4 197  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 198  
Features of your vehicle  
• The order of search or playback of  
songs in the iPod can be different from  
the order searched in the audio system.  
• When connecting iPod with the iPod  
Power Cable, insert the connector to the  
multimedia socket completely. If not  
inserted completely, communications  
between iPod and audio may be inter-  
rupted.  
All Random  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key.  
key Set [ A.RDM]  
3
TUNE knob or  
• If the iPod is disabled due to its own  
malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:  
Refer to iPod manual)  
Plays all songs within the currently play-  
ing category in random order.  
• When adjusting the sound effects of the  
iPod and the audio system, the sound  
effects of both devices will overlap and  
might reduce or distort the quality of the  
sound.  
• An iPod may not operate normally on  
low battery.  
Information  
• Some iPod devices, such as the  
iPhone, can be connected through the  
-interface. The device must have audio  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology capa-  
bility (such as for stereo headphone  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ). The  
device can play, but it will not be con-  
trolled by the audio system.  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key.  
key Set [ Info]  
4
TUNE knob or  
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer func-  
tion of an iPod when adjusting the audio  
system’s volume, and turn off the  
equalizer of the audio system when  
using the equalizer of an iPod.  
Displays information of the current song.  
Search  
• When not using iPod with car audio, detach  
the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod  
may remain in accessory mode, and may  
not work properly.  
• To use iPod features within the audio, use  
the cable provided upon purchasing an  
iPod device.  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key.  
key Set [ Search]  
5
TUNE knob or  
• Skipping or improper operation may occur  
depending on the characteristics of your  
iPod/Phone device.  
• Some iPod models may not support  
communication protocol and files may  
not properly play.  
• If your iPhone is connected to both the  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and  
USB, the sound may not be properly  
played. In your iPhone, select the Dock  
connector or Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology to change the sound output  
(source).  
Supported iPod models:  
- iPod Mini®  
- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic) genera-  
tion  
- iPod Nano® 1st~4th generation  
- iPod Touch® 1st~2nd generation  
4 198  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 199  
Features of your vehicle  
MENU : My Music  
Information  
Delete All  
MENU  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ Info] Press the  
3
key Set [ Del.All]  
5
TUNE knob or  
through the TUNE knob or  
key.  
MENU  
In My Music mode, press the  
key  
to set the Repeat, Random, Information, key.  
Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection  
features.  
Deletes all songs of My Music.  
Displays information of the current song.  
Delete Selection  
MENU  
❈ Press the  
display.  
key to turn off info  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key.  
key Set [ Del.Sel]  
6
TUNE knob or  
Delete  
Songs within My Music are selected and  
deleted.  
➀ Select the songs you wish to delete  
MENU  
Press the  
key Set [ Delete]  
4
through the  
key.  
TUNE knob or  
from the list.  
Repeat  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ RPT]  
Deletes currently playing file  
RPT  
1
TUNE knob or  
key.  
Repeats the currently playing song.  
Random  
MENU  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ RDM]  
RDM  
2
TUNE knob or  
key.  
MENU  
➁ After selecting, press the  
and select the delete menu.  
key  
Plays all songs within the currently play-  
ing folder in random order.  
In the play screen, pressing delete will  
delete the currently playing song.  
Deletes file from list  
➀ Select the file you wish to delete by  
TUNE knob.  
using the  
➁ Press the  
MENU  
key and select the  
delete menu to delete the selected file.  
4 199  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 200  
Features of your vehicle  
AUX  
✽
NOTICE FOR USING THE My  
Music  
AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-  
rently connected with the AUX terminal.  
• Even if memory is available, a maxi-  
mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.  
• The same song can be copied up to  
1,000 times.  
AUX mode will automatically start when  
an external device is connected with the  
AUX terminal.  
• Memory info can be checked in the  
System menu of Setup.  
If an external device is connected, you  
MEDIA  
can also press the  
to AUX mode.  
key to change  
❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless  
there is an external device connected  
to the AUX terminal.  
❈ Fully insert the AUX cable into the  
AUX terminal for use.  
4 200  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 201  
Features of your vehicle  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
AUDIO  
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless  
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Audio  
Changing Song/File  
TRACK  
While song (file) is playing  
key  
TRACK  
MEDIA  
• Press the  
mode in order of CD➟USB➟AUX➟My  
key to change the  
Technology audio features  
• Press the  
key : Plays the  
Music➟BT Audio.  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio  
may not be supported depending on  
the compatibility of your Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology mobile phone.  
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology audio, you must first pair and  
connect the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology mobile phone.  
current song from the beginning.  
TRACK  
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology audio will start play-  
ing.  
❈ If the  
key is pressed again  
within 1 second, the previous song is  
played.  
❈ Audio may not automatically start play-  
ing in some mobile phones.  
SEEK  
While song (file) is playing  
key  
SEEK  
• Press the  
next song.  
key : Plays the  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio  
can be used only when the [Audio  
On  
Streaming] of Phone is turned  
.
❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
SETUP  
Audio Streaming : Press the  
key Select [Phone] through the tune  
3
knob or  
Streaming] through the  
key Select [Audio  
TUNE  
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology audio features  
• Play / Stop  
On  
Off  
knob Set  
/
Press the TUNE knob to play and  
pause the current song.  
❈ The previous song / next song / play /  
pause functions may not be supported  
in some mobile phones.  
4 201  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 202  
Features of your vehicle  
Check call history and making call  
Making a call using the Steering  
remote controller  
PHONE (if equipped)  
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the  
key on the steering remote con-  
troller.  
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone features  
➁ The call history list will be displayed  
on the screen.  
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone, you must first pair  
and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology mobile phone.  
➂ Press the  
call to the selected number.  
key again to connect a  
Redialing the most recently called  
number  
• If the mobile phone is not paired or con-  
nected, it is not possible to enter Phone  
mode. Once a phone is paired or con-  
nected, the guidance screen will be dis-  
played.  
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the  
key on the steering remote con-  
troller.  
➁ The most recently called number is  
redialed.  
(1) VOLUME button : Raises or lowers  
speaker volume.  
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition  
(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone will be automatically  
connected. Even if you are outside, the  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone  
will be automatically connected once  
you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If  
you do not want automatic Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology phone connection,  
set the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
to OFF.  
(2) MUTE button : Mutes audio Volume  
during a call.  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
button : Activates voice recogni-  
button : Places and transfers  
button : Ends calls or cancels  
tion.  
calls.  
functions.  
4 202  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 203  
Features of your vehicle  
Phone Book  
Phone MENU  
✽
NOTICE  
PHONE  
If you need more information about  
Kia’s Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.  
Contact kia website “www.kia.com”  
(OWNERS>General Info>Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology ).  
PHONE  
Press the  
key to display three  
Press the  
through the  
key Set [ P. Book]  
menus (Call History, Phone book, Phone  
Setup).  
RDM  
2
TUNE knob or  
key.  
The Phone book is displayed and can be  
used to select a number and make a call.  
❈ If more than one number is saved to  
one contact, then a screen showing  
the mobile phone number, house and  
office number is displayed. Select the  
desired number to make the call.  
❈ If Phone book does not exist, a screen  
asking whether to download Phone  
book is displayed. (The download fea-  
ture may not be supported in some  
mobile phones)  
Call History  
PHONE  
Press the  
through the  
key.  
key Set [ History]  
RPT  
1
TUNE knob or  
Phone Setup  
The call history is displayed and can be  
used to select a number and make a call.  
PHONE  
Press the  
through the  
key.  
key Set [  
Setup]  
3
TUNE knob or  
If call history does not exist, a screen ask-  
ing whether to download call history is  
displayed. (The download feature may not  
be supported in some mobile phones)  
The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
mobile phone setup screen is displayed.  
For more information, refer to “Phone  
Setup”.  
4 203  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 204  
Features of your vehicle  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features  
• Some features may not be supported in  
some Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
enabled mobile phone and devices.  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology func-  
tions may operate unstably depending  
on the communication state.  
What is Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology?  
can be used only when the mobile phone  
has been paired and connected with the  
device. For more information on pairing  
and connecting Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology endbled mobile phones,  
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology that  
allows multiple devices to be connected  
in a short range, low-powered devices  
like hands-free, stereo headset, wireless  
remote controller, etc. For more information,  
visit the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
website at www.Bluetooth.com  
• Do not use a cellular phone or perform  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology settings  
(e.g. pairing a phone) while driving.  
• When  
a
Bluetooth®  
Wireless  
Technology mobile phone is connected,  
a ( ) icon will appear at the top of the  
screen. If a ( ) icon is not displayed,  
• Some Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
-
enabled phones may not be recognized  
by the system or fully compatible with  
the system.  
• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology related features of the audio  
system, refer your phone’s User’s  
Manual for phone-side Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology operations.  
this indicates that  
a
Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology enabled device  
has not been connected. Your must  
connect the device before use. For  
more information on Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology mobile phones,  
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.  
• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology enabled mobile  
phone will work only when the  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology option  
within your mobile phone has been  
turned on. (Methods of turning on the  
•
The phone must be paired to the audio  
system to use Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology related features.  
• You will not be able to use the hands-  
free feature when your phone (in the  
car) is outside of the cellular service  
area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground,  
in a mountainous area, etc.).  
Bluetooth®  
Wireless  
Technology  
enabled feature may differ depending  
on the mobile phone.)  
• In some mobile phones, starting the  
ignition while talking through Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology handsfree call will  
result in the call becoming disconnect-  
ed. (Switch the call back to your mobile  
phone when starting the ignition.)  
(Continued)  
4 204  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 205  
Features of your vehicle  
(continued)  
• If you do not want automatic Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology power off.  
• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the  
vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may  
be difficult to hear the other person’s  
voice during a call.  
• Do not place the phone near or inside  
metallic objects, otherwise communica-  
tions  
with  
Bluetooth®  
Wireless  
Technology system or cellular service  
stations can be disturbed.  
• While a phone is connected through  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology your  
phone may discharge quicker than usual  
for additional Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology-related operations.  
• Some cellular phones or other devices  
may cause interference noise or mal-  
function to audio system. In this case,  
store the device in a different location  
may resolve the situation.  
• Please save your phone name in  
English, or your phone name may not  
be displayed correctly.  
• If Priority is set upon vehicle  
ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology phone will be auto-  
matically connected.  
Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology phone will be auto-  
matically connected once you are in the  
vicinity of the vehicle.  
4 205  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 206  
Features of your vehicle  
• Upon inputting your phone book, spe-  
Starting Voice Command  
VOICE COMMAND (if equipped)  
cial symbols and numbers cannot be  
recognized by voice. For example, “#  
John Doe%&” will be recognized as  
“John Doe”.  
• To start voice command, shortly press  
the key on the steering wheel  
remote controller.  
• The voice recognition feature of this  
product supports recognition of the  
commands listed within this user’s  
manual.  
• If voice command is in [Normal Mode],  
then the system will say “Please say a  
command. Beep”  
• While using voice recognition, operating  
the steering remote control or the device  
will terminate voice recognition and allow  
you to manually operate desired func-  
tions.  
❈ If voice command is in [Expert Mode],  
then the system will only say a “Beep-”  
❈ Setting Voice command [Normal  
Mode]/[Expert Mode]:  
• Position of the microphone is above the  
head of the driver’s seat.  
SETUP  
Press the  
through the  
key Select [ System]  
4
TUNE knob or  
key  
• Voice recognition may not function  
properly due to outside noise. The fol-  
lowing conditions can affect the per-  
formance of Voice Recognition:  
Select [Prompt Feedback] through the  
TUNE knob Set [Normal Mode]/[Expert  
Mode]  
• Say the voice command.  
- When the windows and sunroof are  
open  
- When the heating/cooling system is on  
- When passing a tunnel  
• For proper voice recognition, say the  
voice command after the guidance  
message and the “Beep” sound.  
- When driving on rugged and uneven  
roads  
• After downloading Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone book, the system  
requires some times to convert the  
phone book into voice information.  
During this time, voice recognition may  
not operate properly.  
4 206  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 207  
Features of your vehicle  
Skipping the Guidance Message  
Ending Voice Command  
While the guidance message is being  
stated, shortly press the  
0.8 seconds) to discontinue the guidance  
message and sound the “beep”.  
After the “beep”, say the voice command.  
• While using voice command, press and  
hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) to  
end voice command.  
key (under  
• While using voice command, pressing  
the steering wheel remote controller or  
a different key will end voice command.  
• In a state where the system is waiting  
for your voice command, say “cancel” or  
“end” to end voice command.  
• In a state where the system is waiting  
for your voice command, shortly press  
the key (under 0.8 seconds) to end  
voice command.  
4 207  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 208  
Features of your vehicle  
Monday  
Monday  
Playlists  
Songs  
"Playlists" is filtering keyword for  
searching mode of playlists for iPod  
"Songs" is filtering keyword for  
searching mode of playlists for iPod  
"Audiobooks" is filtering keyword  
for searching mode of playlists  
for iPod  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Audiobooks  
Saturday  
Sunday  
Saturday  
Sunday  
Use tune knob  
Volume  
Use tune knob  
Podcasts  
"Podcasts" is filtering keyword  
for searching mode of playlists  
for iPod  
Volume  
Max  
Volume maxinmum  
Volume mininmum  
Automatically selects and saves  
channels  
Min  
RPT (Repeat)  
Audio play mode of Reapeat  
Audio play mode of Folder  
Reapeat  
AST (Auto store)  
F.RPT (Folder Repeat)  
No Media  
No File  
Empty media file in CD or USB  
Empty media file in CD or USB  
Empty media file in MY MUSIC  
Information of playing files  
Artist name, MP3/CD file cur-  
rently being played  
Song name, MP3/CD file cur-  
rently being played  
Album name, MP3/CD file cur-  
rently being played  
"Genres" is keyword for search-  
ing mode of playlists for iPod  
"Composers" is filtering keyword  
for searching mode of playlists  
for iPod  
RDM (Random)  
Audio play mode of Random  
Audio play mode of Folder  
Random  
F.RDM(Folder Random)  
Empty File  
Info (Information)  
Artist  
A.RDM (All Random)  
COPY  
Audio play mode of All Random  
Copy MP3 file to flash memory  
for MY MUSIC  
Title  
Cancel copy  
File copied  
Free  
Cancel copy mode  
Completed File copy  
Free size of memory  
Copy failed  
Album  
Copy failed  
Search  
Genres  
Composers  
Search files  
Loading CD  
Reading CD  
Reading Error  
Mechanism Error  
Ejecting CD  
Loading CD  
Reading CD  
Reading Error  
Mechanism Error  
Ejecting CD  
4 208  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 209  
Features of your vehicle  
Audio CD  
Audio CD  
Mode Pop up  
Scroll text  
This function is used to select  
popup menu on or off  
Track  
Audio CD song order  
Reading Media  
Reading Media  
Not supported  
Empty iPod  
This function is used to display  
characters longer than the LCD  
text displays  
Not supported file format  
Empty iPod, iPod don't have  
playable data  
Song Info  
Setup display information being  
played  
Communication Error  
Delete  
Communication error between  
audio and iPod or usb  
Delete the paired phone or files  
in MY MUSIC  
Folder/File  
Display Folder/file name, file  
currently being played  
Album/Artist/Song  
Display Album/Artist/Song  
name, file currently being played  
Setup sound mode  
Del.All  
Delete all files  
Del.Sel  
Return  
List  
Select files to delete  
Return menu  
Sound  
Audio Settings  
Setup Audio settings that con-  
sist BASS,Middle,Treble,Fader  
and Balance  
List files or paired phones  
Select Files  
Select Files  
Memory is full,  
Delete files  
Memory is full, Delete  
files  
PowerBass  
This function is used to improve  
bass sound quality  
Over 6000 files. can  
not be copied  
Over 6000 files. can not be  
copied  
Speed Dependent Vol.  
Automatically adjust the volume  
according to the car speed  
Adjust volume level of Dialogue  
Bass is sound of low frequency.  
It can be adjusted sound by  
user  
Over 1000 same files  
can not be copied  
Over 1000 same files can not  
be copied  
Volume Dialogue  
Bass  
System will automati-  
cally switchoff after 1  
hour with ignition off  
System will automatically  
switchoff after 1 hour with  
Middle  
Treble  
Middle is sound of middle fre-  
quency. It can be adjusted  
sound by user  
Battery discharge  
Start the engine  
Battery discharge  
Start the engine  
Setup  
Setup  
Treble is sound of high frequency. It  
can be adjusted sound by user  
Display  
Setup display mode  
4 209  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 210  
Features of your vehicle  
Fader  
Fader is sound positon between  
Dansk  
Polski  
Danish  
FRONT and REAR. It can be  
adjusted sound by user  
Balance is sound positon  
between Right and Left. It can  
be adjusted sound by user  
This function is used to initialize  
setting value  
Polish  
Russian  
Balance  
The system will be  
rebooted  
The system will be  
rebooted  
Please change language  
when ignition ON  
Please change language when  
ignition ON  
Default  
System  
Bluetooth not ready  
Please wait  
You can use BT System for a  
moment Because BT system is  
being initialized  
Setup system or system infor-  
mation  
Memory Information  
VRS Mode  
Display used memory size  
Setup Voice command mode  
Normal mode. This function is  
used to set default value of  
voice recognition factor  
Expert mode. This function is  
used to set exercised value of  
voice recognition factor  
This function is used to select  
user language  
Add a new Bluetooth  
device from your phone  
Add a new Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device from your phone  
You can use BT System for a  
moment Because BT system is  
being initialized or processing  
other command  
Normal  
Processing Bluetooth  
Please try later  
Expert  
Incoming Call  
Call Ended  
Receivng phone  
Call Ended  
Language  
Deutsch  
Call Rejected  
When there is unwanted call,  
You push the button on the  
steering remote controller  
"Unknown" mean Headunit or  
phone don't have any informa-  
tion about phone number  
Call is not possible  
Deutsch  
Unknown  
English(UK)  
Français  
Italiano  
English(UK)  
French  
Call is not possible  
MIC Mute  
Italian  
Microphone mute  
Español  
Spanish  
dutch  
Activate Bluetooth  
System?  
Activate Bluetooth® Wireless  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Technology System  
Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology system activated  
swedish  
Bluetooth System  
activated  
4 210  
JD eng 4b(~211).QXP 3/4/2015 4:40 PM Page 211  
Features of your vehicle  
No phone paired.  
Pair a phone?  
Empty phone paired.  
Pairing failed  
Audio & Phone connection have  
failed  
Pair a phone?  
No connected phone.  
Connect a phone?  
No connected phone. Connect a  
phone?  
Already 5 devices  
paired. Delete a  
All 5 phones have already been  
paired. Delete a previously  
paired phone to pair new phone  
Audio & Phone connection have  
succeed  
paired phone?  
Phone book is empty.  
Download?  
Phone book is empty  
Connection complete  
Available only when  
vehicle is stationary  
This is a warning, Do not enter  
the MENU about BT Setup.  
When vehicle is moving  
Connection failed.  
Retry?  
Audio & Phone connection have  
failed  
Listening...  
Listen to instruction of audio  
Downloading phone book from  
phone paired to audio  
Priority changed  
Changed priority about the reg-  
istered phones  
Phone book Download  
Overwrite previous  
phone book?  
Overwrite previous phone book  
information  
Auto Download  
Audio Streaming  
After pairing phone, audio sys-  
tem automatically download  
phone book  
Phone does not support  
Phone book download  
Phone does not support Phone  
book download  
After pairing phone, audio system  
can support Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology streaming mode  
Set outoging volume "0 ~ 5"  
Turn off Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology System  
No connected  
Bluetooth device  
There are phone in the  
connection list  
Phone does not support  
Bluetooth audio  
But it was actually not connect-  
ed BT pairing  
Outgoing Volume  
Bluetooth System Off  
Downloading stopped  
Downloading stopped  
Bluetooth System ON  
Device :  
Turn on Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology System  
Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device name  
Passkey for pairing a phone  
Pair a Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone to the audio  
Passkey  
Pairing complete  
4 211  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 212  
Features of your vehicle  
■ CD Player : AC111A2EE  
4 212  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 213  
Features of your vehicle  
SEEK  
TRACK  
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND  
FUNCTIONS  
(1) (EJECT)  
Ejects the disc.  
(6)  
When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)  
- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-  
quency.  
Audio Head Unit  
RADIO  
(2)  
Switches to Radio(FM/AM) mode.  
- Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes  
: changes the track, Song(file)  
When pressed and held (0.8 seconds)  
Each time the key is pressed,the mode is  
changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA  
➟ AM ➟ AMA.  
- Radio mode : continuously changes the  
frequency. Upon release, plays the cur-  
rent frequency  
MEDIA  
(3)  
Switches to Media mode.  
-
Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :  
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file  
Each time the key is pressed, the mode  
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod)  
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.  
- During a Handsfree call, controls the  
call volume.  
PTY  
FOLDER  
(7)  
PHONE  
(4)  
Switches to Phone mode.  
RDS Radio mode : searches RDS pro-  
gram types.  
CD/USB/MP3 modes : searches folders.  
❈ When a phone is not connected, the  
connection screen is displayed.  
(5) PWR/VOL knob  
Power : Press to turn power on/off.  
Volume : Turn left/right to control vol-  
ume.  
4 213  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 214  
Features of your vehicle  
SETUP  
(11)  
Switches to Setup mode.  
(12) TUNE knob  
Radio mode : turn to change broadcast  
frequencies.  
Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :  
turn to search tracks/channels/files.  
(8)  
Turns the monitor display on/off.  
(13) RESET  
Forced system termination and system  
restart.  
TA  
(9)  
Set TA(Traffic Announcement) feature  
On/Off  
SCAN  
(10)  
Radio Mode  
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-  
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5  
seconds each  
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds):  
Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset  
1
6
for 5 seconds each.  
~
Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :  
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds  
each.  
4 214  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 215  
Features of your vehicle  
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)  
- Radio mode, automatically searches  
broadcast frequencies and channels  
Steering remote controller  
(6)  
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)  
- When pressed in the phone screen,  
displays call history screen  
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes,  
rewinds or fast forwards the track or  
song(file)  
- When pressed in the dial screen,  
makes a call  
- When pressed in the incoming call  
screen, answers the call  
(4) MODE  
- When pressed during call waiting,  
switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)  
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)  
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology Handsfree wait  
mode, redials the last call  
- When pressed during a Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology Handsfree call,  
switches call back to mobile phone  
(Private)  
Each time this key is pressed, the mode  
is changed in order of FM1➟FM2  
➟FMA➟ AM➟AMA➟USB or iPod➟AUX  
➟My Music➟BT Audio  
If the media is not connected or a disc is  
not inserted, corresponding modes will  
be disabled.  
(1) VOLUME  
Used to control volume.  
(5)  
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)  
- Starts voice recognition  
- When pressed while calling on the  
mobile phone, switches call back to  
(2) MUTE  
Mutes audio volume.  
Bluetooth®  
Wireless  
Handsfree (Operates only when  
Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology  
Handsfree is connected)  
Technology  
- When selecting during a voice prompt,  
stops the prompt and converts to voice  
command waiting state  
(3) SEEK  
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)  
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)  
- Ends voice recognition  
- Radio mode : searches broadcast fre-  
quencies saved to presets.  
(7)  
Ends phone call  
- Media (CD / USB / iPod / My Music / BT  
Audio) modes : changes the track, file.  
4 215  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 216  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Mode Display  
Switching to Radio Mode  
RADIO MODE  
Displays currently operating mode  
Basic Mode Screen  
RADIO  
Pressing the  
key will change  
the operating mode in order of FM1  
➟FM2➟FMA➟AM➟AMA.  
(2) Frequency  
Displays the current frequency  
(3) Preset  
Displays current preset number [1] ~  
[6]  
(4) Preset Display  
Displays saved presets  
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within  
SETUP  
[Display], then pressing the  
key will display the Radio Pop-  
(5) Autostore  
RADIO  
Automatically saves frequencies with  
superior reception to Preset buttons  
up Mode screen.  
Turn the TUNE knob to move the  
focus. Press the knob to select.  
(6) RDS Menu  
Displays the RDS Menu  
(7) RDS Info  
Displays RDS broadcast information  
4 216  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 217  
Features of your vehicle  
Searching Radio Frequencies  
Using Radio Mode  
✽
NOTICE  
While listening to a frequency you want  
to save as a preset, press and hold one of  
the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons (over 0.8 sec-  
onds) to save the current frequency to  
the selected preset.  
Using Seek  
Selecting /Saving Presets  
SEEK  
Press the  
previous/next frequency.  
TRACK  
key to play the Press the  
1
~
the desired preset.  
6
buttons to play  
Auto Store  
Using TUNE  
Press the  
cally save receivable frequencies to  
Preset buttons.  
button to automati-  
Turn the  
desired frequency.  
TUNE knob to select the  
• FM : Increases/decreased by 50kHz  
• AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz  
✽
NOTICE  
While Auto Store is operating, pressing  
the [Cancel] button again will cancel  
Auto Store and restore the previous fre-  
quency.  
Press the  
button to display the  
broadcast information for the frequency  
saved to each button.  
4 217  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 218  
Features of your vehicle  
RDS Menu  
Program Type  
TA (Traffic Announcement)  
Press the  
(Alternative Frequency), Region and  
News features.  
button to set the AF  
PTY  
FOLDER  
Press the  
key to search for  
TA  
Press the  
key to turn the TA  
(Traffic Announcement) feature  
On/Off.  
the desired Program type.  
Turn the  
TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired program type.  
Once you find the desired program type,  
✽
NOTICE  
The RDS Menu is not supported within  
AM or AMA mode.  
press the  
TUNE knob.  
After selecting the desired Program Type  
and while the Program Type is blinking  
Scan  
SCAN  
Press the  
quencies with superior reception for  
5 seconds each.  
key to preview fre-  
(approximately 5 seconds), pressing the  
PTY  
key will allow you to select a  
FOLDER  
different Program Type broadcast.  
✽
NOTICE  
Once scan is complete, the previous fre-  
quency will be restored.  
While Scan is operating, pressing the  
SCAN  
key will cancel the scan opera-  
tion.  
4 218  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 219  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
MEDIA MODE  
Switching to Media Mode  
MEDIA  
NOTICE  
The media mode pop up screen can be  
displayed only when there are two or  
more media modes turned on.  
Title Icon  
Pressing the  
key will change  
Bluetooth® Wireless  
the operating mode in order of  
➟
When  
a
CD➟USB(iPod)➟AUX➟My Music  
BT Audio.  
Technology, iPod, USB, or AUX  
device is connected or a CD is  
inserted, the corresponding mode  
icon will be displayed.  
Icon  
Title  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
CD  
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within  
SETUP  
[Display], then pressing the  
key will display the Media  
Pop-up Mode screen.  
iPod  
USB  
AUX  
MEDIA  
Turn the TUNE knob to move the  
focus. Press the knob to select.  
4 219  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 220  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Mode  
(7) Random  
AUDIO CD MODE  
Basic Mode Screen  
Displays currently operating mode  
Turns the Random feature on/off  
(2) Operation State  
(8) Repeat  
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis- Turns the Repeat feature on/off  
plays the currently operating function  
(9) List  
(3) Track Info  
Moves to the list screen  
Displays information about the cur-  
rent track  
(4) Play/Pause  
Changes the play/pause state  
(5) Play Time  
Displays the current play time  
(6) Info  
Shows detailed information about  
the current track  
4 220  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 221  
Features of your vehicle  
Changing Tracks  
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks  
Using Audio CD Mode  
SEEK  
Press the  
the previous or next track.  
key to move to While playing, press and hold the  
SEEK  
TRACK  
key (over 0.8 seconds) to  
rewind or fast-forward the current  
track.  
TRACK  
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks  
Once an audio CD is inserted, the  
mode will automatically start and  
begin playing.  
✽
NOTICE  
• Pressing the  
SEEK  
TRACK  
key after the  
track has been playing for 1 seconds  
will start the current track from the  
beginning.  
Scan  
SCAN  
Press the  
10 seconds of each file.  
key to play the first  
SEEK  
• Pressing the  
key before the  
TRACK  
track has been playing for 1 seconds  
will start the previous track.  
Selecting from the List  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired track.  
While playing, press the  
to pause and press  
play.  
button  
button to  
✽
NOTICE  
• Only genuine audio CDs are support-  
ed. Other discs may result in recogni-  
tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with  
labels)  
• The artist and title information are  
displayed on the screen if track infor-  
mation is included within the audio  
CD.  
Once you find the desired track, press  
TUNE knob to start playing.  
the  
4 221  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 222  
Features of your vehicle  
Info  
List  
Audio CD Mode Menu  
Press the  
details about the current disc.  
button to display Press the  
button to display the  
Within this mode, you will have  
access to the Info, Random, Repeat  
and List features.  
track list screen.  
Random  
Press the button to play tracks  
in random order.  
Press the button again to turn the  
Random feature off.  
Repeat  
Press the  
button to repeat the  
Turn the  
TUNE knob left/right to  
current track. Press the button again  
to turn the repeat feature off.  
search for tracks. Once the desired track  
is displayed, press the knob to select and  
play.  
4 222  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 223  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Mode  
(8) Random  
MP3 CD MODE  
Displays currently operating mode.  
Turns the Random feature on/off  
Basic Mode Screen  
(2) Operation State  
(9) Repeat  
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis- Turns the Repeat feature on/off  
plays the currently operating function  
(10) Copy  
(3) File Index  
Copies the current file into My Music  
Displays the current file number  
(11) List  
(4) File Info  
Moves to the list screen  
Displays information about the current file  
(5) Play/Pause  
Changes the play/pause state  
(6) Play Time  
Displays the current play time  
(7) Info  
Shows detailed information about  
the current file  
4 223  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 224  
Features of your vehicle  
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files  
Using MP3 CD Mode  
Changing Files  
Press the  
the previous or next file.  
SEEK  
TRACK  
key to move to  
While playing, press and hold the  
SEEK  
key (over 0.8 seconds) to  
rewind or fast-forward the current file.  
TRACK  
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files  
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the  
mode will automatically start and  
being playing.  
✽
NOTICE  
• Pressing the  
SEEK  
TRACK  
Scan  
key after the file  
has been playing for 1 seconds will  
start the current file from the begin-  
ning.  
SCAN  
Press the  
10 seconds of each file.  
key to play the first  
SEEK  
• Pressing the  
key before the  
TRACK  
file has been playing for 1 seconds will  
start the previous file.  
Selecting from the List  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired file.  
While playing, press the  
to pause and press  
play.  
button  
button to  
✽
NOTICE  
If there are numerous files and folders  
within the disc, reading time could take  
more than 10 seconds and the list may  
not be displayed or song searches may  
not operate. Once loading is complete,  
try again.  
Once you find the desired file, press the  
TUNE knob to start playing.  
4 224  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 225  
Features of your vehicle  
Searching Folders  
PTY  
• The title, artist and album info are dis-  
played only when such information are  
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.  
MP3 CD Mode Menu  
Press the  
and search folders.  
key to select  
FOLDER  
Within this mode, you will have  
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,  
Copy and List features.  
Once the desired folder is displayed,  
press the TUNE knob to select.  
Random  
Press the  
random order.  
button to play files in  
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-  
ture changes in order of Random Folder  
➟ Random All➟ Off.  
• Random Folder : Plays all files within  
the current folder in Random order.  
• Random All : Plays all files in Random  
order.  
The first file within the selected folder will  
begin playing.  
Info  
Press the  
details about the current file.  
button to display  
✽
NOTICE  
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as  
the default display within Display  
setup, the album/artist/file informa-  
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-  
mation.  
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option  
is set as the default display, the folder  
name/file name are displayed as  
detailed file information.  
4 225  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 226  
Features of your vehicle  
Repeat  
List  
Press the  
current file or folder.  
button to repeat the Press the  
button to display the  
file list screen.  
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-  
ture changes in order of Repeat ➟Repeat  
Folder➟Off.  
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.  
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within  
the current Folder.  
Copying Files  
Press the  
current file into My Music.  
button to copy the  
Turn the  
TUNE knob left/right to  
search for files. Once the desired file is  
displayed, press the knob to select and  
play.  
✽
NOTICE  
Selecting another feature during copy-  
ing will display a pop-up asking whether  
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,  
select 'Yes’.  
4 226  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 227  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Mode  
(8) Random  
USB MODE  
Displays currently operating mode  
Turns the Random feature on/off  
Basic Mode Screen  
(2) Operation State  
(9) Repeat  
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis- Turns the Repeat feature on/off  
plays the currently operating function  
(10) Copy  
(3) File Index  
Copies the current file into My Music  
Displays the current file number  
(11) List  
(4) File Info  
Moves to the list screen  
Displays information about the current file  
(5) Play/Pause  
Changes the play/pause state  
(6) Play Time  
Displays the current play time  
(7) Info  
Displays detailed information for the  
current file  
4 227  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 228  
Features of your vehicle  
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files  
Using USB Mode  
Changing Files  
While playing, press and hold the  
SEEK  
SEEK  
Press the  
the previous or next file.  
keys to move to  
key (over 0.8 seconds) to  
rewind or fast-forward the current file.  
TRACK  
Playing/Pausing USB Files  
TRACK  
Once a USB is connected, the mode  
will automatically start and begin  
playing a USB file.  
✽
NOTICE  
• Pressing the  
Scan  
SEEK  
TRACK  
key after the  
SCAN  
Press the  
10 seconds of each file.  
key to play the first  
file has been playing for 1 seconds will  
start the current file from the begin-  
ning.  
SEEK  
TRACK  
• Pressing the  
key before the  
file has been playing for 1 seconds will  
start the previous file.  
Selecting from the List  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired file.  
While playing, press the  
to pause and press  
play.  
button  
button to  
✽
NOTICE  
• Loading may require additional time if  
there are many files and folders within  
the USB and result in faulty list display  
or file searching. Normal operations  
will resume once loading is complete.  
• The device may not support normal  
operation when using a USB memory  
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB  
Memory.  
Once you find the desired file, press the  
TUNE knob to start playing.  
4 228  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 229  
Features of your vehicle  
Searching Folders  
PTY  
USB Mode Menu  
✽
NOTICE  
Press the  
and search folders.  
key to select  
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as  
the default display within Display  
setup, the album/artist/file informa-  
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-  
mation.  
FOLDER  
Within this mode, you will have  
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,  
Copy and List features.  
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option  
is set as the default display, the folder  
name/file name are displayed as  
detailed file information.  
• The title, artist and album info are dis-  
played only when such information are  
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.  
Once the desired folder is displayed,  
press the TUNE knob to select.  
Random  
Press the  
random order.  
button to play files in  
The first file within the selected folder will  
begin playing.  
Info  
Press the  
details about the current file.  
button to display  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
feature changes in order of Random  
Folder➟Random All➟Off.  
• Random Folder : Plays the files in the  
current folder in random order.  
• Random All : Plays all files in random  
order.  
4 229  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 230  
Features of your vehicle  
Repeat  
List  
Press the  
current file or folder.  
button to repeat the Press the  
button to display the  
file list screen.  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
feature changes in order of Repeat➟  
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.  
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current  
file.  
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all  
files within the current folder.  
Copying Files  
Press the  
current file into My Music.  
button to copy the  
Turn the  
TUNE knob left/right to  
search for files. Once the desired file  
is displayed, press the knob to select  
and play.  
✽
NOTICE  
Selecting another feature during copy-  
ing will display a pop-up asking whether  
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,  
select 'Yes’.  
4 230  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 231  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Mode  
(8) Repeat  
iPod MODE  
Displays currently operating mode  
Turns the Repeat feature on/off  
Basic Mode Screen  
(2) Operation State  
(9) List  
From Repeat / Random, displays the Moves to the list screen  
currently operating function  
(3) Song Index  
Displays the current song/total num-  
ber of songs  
(4) Song Info  
Displays information about the cur-  
rent song  
(5) Play/Pause  
Changes the play/pause state  
(6) Play Time  
Displays the current play time  
(7) Random  
Turns the Random feature on/off  
4 231  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 232  
Features of your vehicle  
Searching Categories  
Using iPod Mode  
✽
NOTICE  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired category.  
iPods with unsupported communication  
protocols may not properly operate in  
the audio system.  
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs  
Once an iPod is connected, the  
mode will automatically start and  
begin playing an iPod song.  
Changing Songs  
SEEK  
Press the  
previous or next song.  
key to move to the  
TRACK  
✽
NOTICE  
• Pressing the  
SEEK  
TRACK  
key after the  
song has been playing for 1 seconds  
will start the current song from the  
beginning.  
SEEK  
Once you find the desired category,  
press the  
play.  
• Pressing the  
key before the  
TRACK  
TUNE knob to select and  
song has been playing for 1 seconds  
will start the previous song.  
• Slight time differences may exist  
depending your iPod product.  
While playing, press the  
to pause and press  
play.  
button  
button to  
✽
NOTICE  
There are eight categories that can be  
searched, including Playlists, Artists,  
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,  
Audiobooks and Podcasts.  
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs  
While playing, press and hold the  
SEEK  
key (over 0.8 seconds) to  
rewind or fast-forward the current song.  
TRACK  
4 232  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 233  
Features of your vehicle  
Repeat  
Category Menu  
Within the iPod Category menu, you  
iPod Mode Menu  
Press the  
current song. Press the button again  
to turn the repeat feature off.  
button to repeat the  
Within this mode, you will have  
access to the Random, Repeat and  
List features.  
will have access to the  
and features.  
, Home,  
• Repeat : Repeats the current song  
(1)  
: Displays the play screen  
Random  
(2) Home : Moves to the iPod root catego-  
ry screen  
Press the button to play songs  
in random order.  
(3)  
: Moves to the previous cate-  
gory  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
feature changes in order of Random  
Album➟Random All➟Off.  
✽
NOTICE  
• Random Album : Shuffle Album plays  
album in Random order.  
• If the search mode is accessed while  
playing a song, the most recently  
searched category is displayed.  
• Search steps upon initial connection  
may differ depending on the type of  
iPod device.  
• Random All : Plays all songs in  
Random order.  
4 233  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 234  
Features of your vehicle  
List  
AUX MODE  
✽
NOTICE  
Press the  
Category Menu.  
button to display the  
• If an external device connector is con-  
nected with the AUX terminal, then  
AUX mode will automatically operate.  
Once the connector is disconnected,  
the previous mode will be restored.  
• AUX mode can be used only when an  
external audio player (camcorder, car  
VCR, etc.) has been connected.  
Using AUX Mode  
MEDIA  
Press the  
key Select [AUX]  
• The AUX volume can be controlled  
separately from other audio modes.  
• Connecting a connector jack to the  
AUX terminal without an external  
device will convert the system to AUX  
mode, but only output noise. When an  
external device is not being used, also  
remove the connector jack.  
• When the external device power is  
connected to the power jack, playing  
the external device may output noise.  
In such cases, disconnect the power  
connection before use.  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired category.  
An external device can be connected to  
play music.  
Once you find the desired category,  
press the  
and play.  
TUNE knob to select  
Connecting an External Device  
External audio players (Camcorders, car  
VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-  
icated cable.  
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX  
jack upon use.  
4 234  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 235  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Mode  
(7) Info  
MY MUSIC MODE  
Basic Mode Screen  
Displays currently operating mode  
Displays detailed information for the  
current file  
(2) Operation State  
(8) Random  
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-  
plays the currently operating function Turns the Random feature on/off  
(3) File Index (9) Repeat  
Displays the current file/total number Turns the Repeat feature on/off  
of files  
(10) Delete  
(4) File Info  
Deletes the current file  
Displays information about the cur-  
rent file  
(11) List  
Moves to the list screen  
(5) Play/Pause  
Changes the play/pause state  
(6) Play Time  
Displays the current play time  
4 235  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:48 PM Page 236  
Features of your vehicle  
Using My Music Mode  
Scan  
✽
NOTICE  
• Pressing the  
SEEK  
TRACK  
SCAN  
key after the  
Press the  
10 seconds of each file.  
key to play the first  
file has been playing for 1 seconds will  
start the current file from the begin-  
ning.  
Playing/Pausing My Music Files  
SEEK  
TRACK  
• Pressing the  
key before the  
file has been playing for 1 seconds will  
start the previous file.  
Selecting from the List  
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to  
search for the desired file.  
While playing, press the  
to pause and press  
play.  
button  
button to  
✽
NOTICE  
If there are no files saved within My  
Music, the [My Music] button will be  
disabled.  
Once you find the desired file, press the  
TUNE knob to start playing.  
Changing Files  
SEEK  
Press the  
the previous or next file.  
key to move to  
TRACK  
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files  
While playing, press and hold the  
key (over 0.8 seconds) to  
rewind or fast-forward the current file.  
SEEK  
TRACK  
4 236  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 237  
Features of your vehicle  
Repeat  
My Music Mode Menu  
List Menu  
Press the  
current song. Press the button again  
to turn the repeat feature off.  
button to repeat the  
Within this mode, you will have  
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,  
Delete and List features.  
From the List screen, it is possible to  
delete files you previously saved into  
My Music.  
Deleting Files  
Press the  
current file.  
button to delete the  
button to display the  
List  
Press the  
file list screen.  
Info  
Press the button or individually  
select the files you want to delete. Once  
Press the  
details about the current file.  
button to display  
files are selected, the  
button and  
buttons will be enabled.  
✽
NOTICE  
(1)  
: Moves to the previous screen  
The title, artist and album info are dis-  
played only when such information is  
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.  
(2) Sellect All: Selects all files  
(3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected  
files  
Turn the  
TUNE knob left/right to  
Random  
(4) Delete: Deletes selected files  
search for files. Once the desired file is  
displayed, press the knob to select and  
play.  
Press the  
button to play files in  
random order. Press the button again  
to turn the Random feature off.  
4 237  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 238  
Features of your vehicle  
®
Bluetooth Wireless Technology  
AUDIO MODE  
After selecting the files you want to  
delete, press the  
the selected files.  
✽
NOTICE - USING THE  
Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Audio Mode  
button to delete  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio  
Mode can be used only when a  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
phone has been connected.  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio  
Mode will not be available when con-  
necting mobile phones that do not  
support this feature.  
• While Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology phone is connect-  
ed, then the music will also stop.  
Using Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Audio Mode  
✽
NOTICE  
• If there is memory available, up to  
6,000 files can be saved.  
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Audio  
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
device is connected, the mode will auto-  
matically start.  
• Identical files cannot be copied more  
than 1,000 times.  
• To check memory information, go to  
SETUP  
[ S y s t e m ] [ M e m o r y  
Information]  
• Moving the Track up/down while  
Bluetooth®  
playing  
Wireless  
Technology audio mode may result in  
pop noises in some mobile phones.  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
streaming audio may not be support-  
ed in some mobile phones.  
• When returning to Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology Audio mode  
after ending a call, the mode may not  
automatically restart in some mobile  
phones.  
While playing, press the  
pause and press  
button to  
button to play.  
• Receiving an incoming call or making  
an outgoing call while playing  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio  
may result in audio interference.  
4 238  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 239  
Features of your vehicle  
✽
✽
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
The play/pause feature may operate dif- • If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
ferently depending on the mobile phone.  
audio is not operating properly, check  
whether the feature is turned off at  
SETUP  
Changing Files  
[Phone]  
[Audio stream-  
SEEK  
ing]. If the feature is off, turn back on  
and try again.  
Press the  
the previous or next file.  
TRACK  
key to move to  
• If music is not yet playing from your  
mobile device after converting to  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
Audio mode, pressing the play button  
once may start playing the mode.  
Check to see that music is playing  
from the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device after converting to  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio  
Mode.  
Setting Connection  
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
device has not been connected, press  
SETUP  
the  
key [Phone] button to  
display the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology connection screen.  
It is possible to use the pair phone, con-  
nect/disconnect and delete features from  
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
phone.  
4 239  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 240  
Features of your vehicle  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
CAUTION  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
Handsfree is feature that  
Handsfree refers to a device which  
allows the user to conveniently  
make phone calls with Bluetooth®  
Using Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Handsfree  
a
enables drivers to practice safe  
driving. Connecting the car audio  
Wireless  
phones through the audio system.  
Technology  
mobile  
system with  
a
Bluetooth®  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
refers to a short-distance wireless  
networking technology which uses a  
2.45GHz frequency to connect vari-  
ous devices within a certain distance.  
• Supported within PCs, external  
Wireless Technology phone  
allows the user to conveniently  
make calls, receive calls, and  
manage the phone book. Before  
using the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology, carefully read the  
contents of this user’s manual.  
devices,  
Bluetooth®  
Wireless  
• Excessive use or operations  
while driving may lead to negli-  
gent driving practices and be the  
cause of accidents.  
Technology phones, PDAs, various  
electronic devices, and automotive  
environments, Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology allows data to be trans-  
mitted at high speeds without hav-  
ing to use a connector cable.  
• Do not operate the device exces-  
sively while driving.  
• Viewing the screen for prolonged  
periods of time is dangerous and  
may lead to accidents. When driv-  
ing, view the screen only for short  
periods of time.  
4 240  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 241  
Features of your vehicle  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
✽
NOTICE - USING UPON  
CONNECTING Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology PHONE  
- To turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology feature in your car audio  
SETUP  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology fea-  
tures supported within the vehicle are  
as follows. Some features may not be  
supported depending on your  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice.  
- Answering and placing Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology Handsfree calls  
- Menu operation during call (Switch  
to Private, Switch to call waiting,  
Outgoing volume)  
system, go to  
[turn off] the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology feature.  
> [Phone] and  
• Before connecting the car audio system  
with the mobile phone, check to see that  
the mobile phone supports Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology features.  
• Park the vehicle when connecting the  
car audio system with your mobile  
phone.  
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology, the phone will  
not be found during device searches if  
the phone has been set to hidden state  
or the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
power is turned off. Disable the hidden  
state or turn on the Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology power prior to  
searching/connecting with the car  
audio system.  
• If you do not want to automatically  
connect your Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone, try the following.  
1. Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology feature in your mobile  
phone.  
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology con-  
nection may become intermittently  
disconnected in some mobile phones.  
Follow these steps to try again.  
1. Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology function within the  
mobile phone off/on and try again.  
2. Turn the mobile phone power  
Off/On and try again.  
- Download Call History  
- Download Mobile Phone book  
- Phone book/Call HistoryAuto Download  
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
device auto connection - Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology Audio  
• It is possible to pair up to five  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
devices to the car system.  
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device can be connected at  
a time.  
3 Completely remove the mobile  
phone battery, reboot, and then  
again.  
4. Reboot the audio system and try  
again.  
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and • Other devices cannot be paired while a  
- For more information on Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology features within  
your mobile, refer to your mobile  
phone user’s manual.  
2. Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology feature in your car  
audio system.  
try again.  
• The Handsfree call volume and quali-  
ty may differ depending on the mobile • When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice  
is already connected.  
phone.  
device is being connected, the connec-  
tion process cannot be canceled.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
4 241  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 242  
Features of your vehicle  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
(Continued)  
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
PHONE  
Pairing  
the Steering Remote Controller  
Key /  
Key on  
Handsfree and Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology audio related features will Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless  
When No Devices have been Paired  
operate within this system.  
Technology wireless technology  
Device  
• Normal operation is possible only for  
devices that support Handsfree or  
audio features, such as a Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology mobile phone or  
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
audio device.  
• Only one function can be used at a time  
between the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology audio. (While  
playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
audio, streaming will end upon entering  
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
phone screen.)  
PHONE  
1. Press the  
key or the  
key on the steering remote con-  
troller. The following screen is dis-  
played.  
What is Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology Pairing?  
2. Press the button to enter the  
Pair Phone screen.  
Pairing refers to the process of syn-  
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology phone or device with the  
car audio system for connection.  
Pairing is necessary to connect and  
use the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology feature.  
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device becomes discon-  
nected for various reasons, such as  
being out of range, turning the device  
OFF, or  
a
Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology communication error,  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
devices are automatically searched  
and connected.  
• Placing the audio system within an  
electromagnetic environment may  
result in noise interference.  
4 242  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 243  
Features of your vehicle  
(1) Device : Name of device as shown  
when searching from your Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology device  
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup  
✽
NOTICE  
SETUP  
Press the  
key  
Select  
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]  
Select TUNE knob  
(2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the  
device  
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device (i.e. Mobile  
Phone), search and select your  
car audio system.  
4. After a few moments, a screen is  
displayed where the passkey is  
entered.  
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
devices are paired but none are cur-  
PHONE  
rently connected, pressing the  
key or the  
Here, enter the passkey “0000” to  
pair your Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device with the car  
audio system.  
key on the  
1. The following steps are the same as  
the steps described in the “When No  
Devices have been Paired” section.  
steering remote controller displays the  
following screen. Press the [Pair] but-  
ton to pair a new device or press the  
[Connect] to connect a previously pair  
device.  
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
4 243  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 244  
Features of your vehicle  
From the paired phone list, select the  
device you want to connect and press the  
button.  
Connecting a Device  
✽
NOTICE  
• The waiting period during phone pair-  
ing will last for one minute. The pair-  
ing process will fail if the device is not  
paired within the given time. If the  
pairing process fails, you must start  
the process from the beginning.  
SETUP  
Press the key Select  
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]  
• Generally, most Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology devices will automatically  
connect once pairing is complete.  
However, some devices may require a  
separate verification process to con-  
nect. Check to see whether Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology has been proper-  
ly connected within your mobile  
phone.  
(1) Connected Phone : Device that is cur-  
rently connected  
• List of paired Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology devices can be viewed at  
SETUP  
(2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired  
but not connected  
[Phone] [Paired  
Phone  
List].  
4 244  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 245  
Features of your vehicle  
Changing Priority  
From the paired phone list, select Disconnecting a Device  
the phone you want to change to the  
highest priority, then press the  
button from the Menu. The selected  
device will be changed to the high-  
est priority.  
What is Priority?  
SETUP  
Press the key Select  
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]  
It is possible to pair up to five  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
devices with the car audio system.  
As a result, the “Change Priority’ fea-  
ture is used to set the connection pri-  
ority of paired phones. However, the  
most recently connected phone will  
always be set as the highest priority.  
SETUP  
Press the  
Select [Paired Phone List]  
key Select [Phone]  
From the paired phone list, select the  
currently connected device and press the  
button.  
✽
NOTICE  
When a device is currently connected,  
even if you change the priority to a differ-  
ent device, the currently connected phone  
will always be set as the highest priority.  
4 245  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 246  
Features of your vehicle  
USING Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology  
(4) Setup : Displays Phone related set-  
tings  
Deleting a Device  
SETUP  
Press the key Select  
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]  
✽
NOTICE  
Phone Menu Screen  
• If you press the [Call History] button  
but there is no call history data, a  
prompt is displayed which asks  
whether to download call history data.  
• If you press the [Phone book] button  
but there is no phone book data, a  
prompt is displayed which asks  
whether to download phone book data.  
.
Phone Menus  
With  
a
Bluetooth®  
Technology device connected, press  
Wireless  
PHONE  
the  
menu screen.  
key to display the Phone  
• This feature may not be supported in  
some mobile phones. For more infor-  
mation on download support, refer to  
your mobile phone user’s manual.  
From the paired phone list, select the  
device you want to delete and press the  
button.  
✽
NOTICE  
• When deleting the currently connect-  
ed device, the device will automatical-  
ly be disconnected to proceed with the  
deleting process.  
(1) Dial Number : Displays the dial  
screen where numbers can be dialed  
to make calls  
• If  
a
paired Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device is deleted, the  
device’s call history and phone book  
data will also be deleted.  
• To re-use a deleted device, you must  
pair the device again.  
(2) Call History : Device that is currently  
connected  
(3) Phone book : Displays the Phone  
book list screen  
4 246  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 247  
Features of your vehicle  
Calling by Dialing a Number  
Answering Calls  
✽
NOTICE  
• When the incoming call pop-up is dis-  
played, most Audio and SETUP mode  
features will not operate. Only the call  
volume can be operated.  
• The telephone number may not be  
properly displayed in some mobile  
phones.  
Answering a Call  
PHONE  
Press the  
Number]  
key Select [Dial  
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology device connect-  
ed will display the following screen.  
• When a call is answered with the  
mobile phone, the call mode will auto-  
matically convert to Private mode.  
(1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone num-  
ber  
(1) Caller : Displays the other part’s  
name when the incoming caller is  
saved within your phone book  
(2) Call : If a number has been entered,  
calls the number If no number has  
been entered, switches to call history  
screen  
(2) Incoming Number : Displays the  
incoming number  
(3) End : Deletes the entered phone  
number  
(3) Accept : Accept the incoming call  
(4) Reject : Reject the incoming call  
(4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers  
one digit at a time  
4 247  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 248  
Features of your vehicle  
During a Handsfree Call  
Call History  
✽
NOTICE  
• The call history list will display up to  
30 outgoing, incoming, and missed  
calls.  
PHONE  
Press the  
History]  
key Select [Call  
• Upon downloading call histories, pre-  
viously saved histories are deleted.  
• Incoming calls with hidden caller IDs  
will not be saved in the call history  
list.  
• Previously saved phone book entries  
are stored even if a device is discon-  
nected and re-connected.  
• The download feature may not be sup-  
ported in some mobile phones. Check  
to see that the Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology device supports the down-  
load feature.  
(1) Caller : Displays the other party’s  
name if the incoming caller is saved  
within your phone book  
A list of incoming, outgoing and missed  
calls is displayed.  
(2) Incoming Number : Displays the  
incoming number  
Press the [Download] button to download  
the call history.  
(3) Call time : Displays the call time  
(4) End : Ends call  
(1) Call History :  
(5) Private : Converts to Private mode  
- Displays recent calls (call history)  
- Connects call upon selection  
(6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard  
by the other party  
(2) Download : Download Recent Call  
History  
(7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off  
✽
NOTICE  
If the mic is muted, the other party will  
not be able to hear your voice.  
4 248  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 249  
Features of your vehicle  
Phone Book  
✽
NOTICE  
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be  
copied into car phone book.  
PHONE  
Press the  
[Phone book]  
key Select  
• Upon downloading phone book data,  
previously saved phone book data will  
be deleted.  
• Downloading is not possible if the  
phone book download feature is  
®
turned off within the Bluetooth  
Wireless Technology device. Also, some  
devices may require device authoriza-  
tion upon attempting to download. If  
downloading cannot be normally con-  
®
ducted, check the Bluetooth Wireless  
Technology device setting or the screen  
state.  
• Caller ID information will not be dis-  
played for unsaved callers.  
The list of saved phone book entries is  
displayed. Press the [Download] button  
to download the call history.  
• The download feature may not be sup-  
ported in some mobile phones. Check  
®
to see that the Bluetooth Wireless  
Technology device supports the down-  
load feature.  
(1) Contact List :  
- Displays downloaded phone book  
entries  
- Connects call upon selection  
(2) Download : Download phone book  
entries  
4 249  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 250  
Features of your vehicle  
• Phone related voice commands can be  
®
✽
NOTICE - USING THE Voice  
Recognition  
used only when  
a
Bluetooth  
Wireless Technology device is con-  
nected.  
• When using the voice recognition fea-  
ture, only commands listed within the  
user's manual are supported.  
• Be aware that during the operation of  
the voice recognition system, pressing  
• When making calls by stating a name,  
the corresponding contact must be  
downloaded and stored within the  
audio system.  
any key other than the  
key or  
®
• After downloading the Bluetooth  
touching the screen will terminate  
voice recognition mode.  
Wireless Technology phone book, it  
takes some times to convert the phone  
book data into voice information.  
During this time, voice recognition  
may not properly operate.  
• Pronounce the voice commands natu-  
rally and clearly as if in a normal con-  
versation.  
• For superior voice recognition per-  
formance, position the microphone  
used for voice recognition above the  
head of the driver’s seat and maintain  
a proper position when saying com-  
mands.  
• Within the following situations, voice  
recognition may not function properly  
due to external sound.  
- When the windows and sunroof are  
open  
- When the wind of the cooling / heat-  
ing device is strong  
- When entering and passing through  
tunnels  
- When driving on rugged and uneven  
roads  
- During severe rain (heavy rains,  
windstorms)  
4 250  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 251  
Features of your vehicle  
If voice recognition is in [Normal Mode],  
then the system will say “Please say a  
command. Beep~”  
Skipping Prompt Messages  
VOICE RECOGNITION  
Using Voice Recognition  
While prompt message is being stat-  
ed Shortly press the key on the  
• If voice recognition is in [Expert Mode], steering remote controller (under 0.8  
then the system will only say a “Beep~” seconds)  
Starting Voice Recognition  
• To change the Normal Mode/Expert  
SETUP  
The prompt message is immediately  
ended and the beep tone will sound.  
After the “beep”, say the voice command.  
Shortly press the  
key on the  
Mode setting, go to  
[Prompt Feedback].  
[System]  
steering remote controller .Say a  
command  
✽
NOTICE  
Re-starting Voice Recognition  
For proper recognition, say the com-  
mand after the voice instruction and  
beep tone.  
While system waits for a command  
Shortly press the  
key on the  
steering remote controller (under 0.8  
seconds)  
The command wait state is immediately  
ended and the beep ton will sound. After  
the “beep”, say the voice command.  
4 251  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 252  
Features of your vehicle  
ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION  
While Voice Recognition is operating  
Press and hold the  
key on the  
steering remote controller (over 0.8  
seconds)  
✽
NOTICE  
• While using voice command, pressing  
a steering wheel remote control or a  
different key will end voice command.  
• In a state where the system is waiting  
for a voice command, say “cancel” or  
“end” to end voice command.  
• In a state where the system is waiting  
for a voice command, press and hold  
the key on the steering remote  
controller to end voice command.  
4 252  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 253  
Features of your vehicle  
Pop-up Mode  
Display Settings  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Press the  
[Display] Select [Pop-up Mode]  
key Select  
Starting Mode  
Adjusting the Brightness  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Press the  
Setup screen.  
key to display the Press the  
key Select  
[Display] Select [Brightness]  
This feature is used to display the Pop-up  
Mode screen when entering radio and  
media modes.  
You can select and control options relat-  
ed to [Display], [Sound], [Phone] and  
[System].  
Use the  
,
buttons to adjust the  
When this feature is turned on, pressing  
RADIO  
screen brightness or set the Brightness  
on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.  
MEDIA  
key will display  
the  
the Pop-up Mode screen.  
or  
Default  
Press the  
button to reset.  
✽
NOTICE  
(1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness  
automatically  
The media Pop-up Mode screen can be  
displayed only when two or more media  
modes have been connected.  
(2) Day : Always maintains the bright-  
ness on high  
(3) Night: Always maintains the bright-  
ness on low  
4 253  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 254  
Features of your vehicle  
Scroll Text  
MP3 Information Display  
SETUP  
Sound Settings  
Sound Settings  
Press the  
[Display] Select [Song Info]  
key Select  
SETUP  
Press the  
[Display] Select [Scroll text]  
key Select  
SETUP  
Press the  
[Sound] Select [Audio Setting]  
key Select  
This feature is used to change the infor-  
mation displayed within USB and MP3  
CD modes.  
This feature is used to scroll text dis-  
played on the screen when it is too long  
to be displayed at once.  
When turned on, the text is repeatedly  
scrolled. When turned off, the text is  
scrolled just once.  
(1) Folder File : Displays file name and  
folder name  
(2) Album Artist Song : Displays album  
name/artist name/song  
Use the  
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.  
Use the buttons to adjust the  
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.  
,
,
,
buttons to  
,
Default  
Press the  
button to reset.  
4 254  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 255  
Features of your vehicle  
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume  
Control)  
Voice Recognition Setting  
SETUP  
Touch Screen Beep  
SETUP  
Press the  
[Sound] Select [Volume Dialogue]  
key Select Press the  
key Select  
SETUP  
Press the  
key Select  
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen  
Beep]  
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent  
Vol.]  
Use the  
Volume Dialog.  
,
buttons to adjust the  
This feature is used to turn the touch  
screen beep on/off.  
The volume level is controlled automati-  
cally according to the vehicle speed.  
SDVC can be set by selecting from  
Off/Low/Mid/High.  
4 255  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 256  
Features of your vehicle  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
Setting  
Viewing Paired Phone List  
SETUP  
(
4) Change Priority : Sets currently select-  
ed phone to highest connection priority  
Press the key Select  
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]  
Pairing a New Device  
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-  
LOADING PHONE BOOKS  
• Only phone books within connected  
phones can be downloaded. Also  
check to see that your mobile phone  
supports the download feature.  
• To learn more about whether your  
mobile phone supports phone book  
downloads, refer to your mobile  
phone user’s manual.  
SETUP  
Press the  
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]  
key Select  
• The Phone book for only the connect-  
ed phone can be downloaded. Before  
downloading, check to see whether  
your phone supports the download  
feature.  
This feature is used to view mobile  
phones that have been paired with the  
audio system. Upon selecting a paired  
phone, the setup menu is displayed.  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices  
can be paired with the audio system.  
For more information, refer to the “Setting  
Bluetooth®  
Connection” section within Bluetooth®  
Wireless Technology.  
For more information, refer to the “Pairing  
through Phone Setup” section within  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.  
Wireless  
Technology  
(1)  
: Moves to the previous screen  
Phone  
(2) Connect/Disconnect  
:
Connect/ disconnects currently  
selected phone  
(3) Delete : Deletes the currently select-  
ed phone  
4 256  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 257  
Features of your vehicle  
Downloading Phone books  
Auto Download (Phone Book)  
SETUP  
Audio Streaming  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Press the  
[Phone] Select  
Download]  
key Select Press the  
key Select Press the  
key Select  
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]  
[Phone  
book [Phone] Select [Auto Download]  
This feature is used to automatically  
When Audio Streaming is turned on, you  
can play music files saved in your  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device  
from the car.  
The Phone book is downloaded from the  
mobile phone and the download  
progress is displayed.  
download mobile phone book entries  
once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
phone is connected.  
✽
✽
NOTICE  
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be • The Auto Download feature will  
NOTICE  
copied into car phone book.  
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be  
saved for each paired device.  
• Upon downloading phone book data,  
previously saved phone book data will  
be deleted. However, Phone book  
download mobile phone book entries  
every time the phone is connected.  
The download time may differ  
depending on the number of saved  
phone book entries and the communi-  
cation state.  
entries saved to other paired phones • When downloading a phone book,  
are not deleted.  
first check to see that your mobile  
phone supports the phone book down-  
load feature.  
4 257  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 258  
Features of your vehicle  
Outgoing Volume  
SETUP  
Turning Bluetooth System Off  
SETUP  
✽
NOTICE  
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
back on, go to  
press “Yes”.  
Press the key Select  
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]  
Press the  
key Select  
SETUP  
[Phone] and  
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System  
Off]  
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is  
Bluetooth®  
Wireless  
CAUTION  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology  
audio streaming may not be sup-  
turned  
off,  
Technology related features will not be  
supported within the audio system.  
ported  
in  
some  
Wireless Technology phones.  
Bluetooth®  
Use the  
outgoing volume level.  
,
buttons to adjust the  
4 258  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 259  
Features of your vehicle  
Voice Recognition Mode Setting  
SETUP  
Language  
System Setting  
SETUP  
Press the  
key Select Press the  
key Select  
[System] Select [Voice Recognition [System] Select [Language]  
System]  
Memory Information  
SETUP  
Press the  
key Select  
[System] Select [Memory Information]  
This feature is used to change the sys-  
tem and voice recognition language.  
This feature is used to select the desired  
prompt feedback option from Normal and  
Expert.  
If the language is changed, the system  
will restart and apply the selected lan-  
guage.  
This feature displays information related  
to system memory.  
(1) Normal : When using voice recogni-  
tion, provides detailed guidance  
prompts  
(1) Using : Displays capacity currently in  
use  
(2) Capacity : Displays total capacity  
(2) Expert : When using voice recogni-  
tion, omits some guidance prompts  
✽
NOTICE  
• Voice Recognition is depend on the  
Audio System.  
4 259  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 260  
Features of your vehicle  
• End voice command.  
❈ Illustration on using voice commands  
Shortly pressing the  
key (under 0.8 seconds):  
• Starting voice command.  
Please say a command  
Ding~  
Shortly pressing the  
key (under 0.8 seconds):  
Ding~  
Please say a command  
Phone book  
More Help  
Phone book.  
Please say the name of the phone book you  
want to call.  
More Help.  
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,  
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call  
History or Phone book. Please say a command.  
Ding~  
Cancel  
• Skipping Voice Recognition  
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)  
Shortly pressing the  
0.8 seconds):  
key (under  
Please say a...  
Ding~  
Shortly pressing the  
(under 0.8 seconds)  
key  
More Help  
More Help.  
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,  
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call  
History or Phone book. Please say a command.  
4 260  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 261  
Features of your vehicle  
Voice Command List  
• Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not be support-  
ed in special circumstances.)  
Command  
More Help  
Function  
Command  
Function  
Provides guidance on commands that can be  
used anywhere in the system.  
FM  
•
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,  
maintains the current state.  
Help  
Provides guidance on commands that can be  
used within the current mode.  
When listening to a different mode, displays  
the most recently played FM screen.  
Call<Name>  
Phone  
Calls <Name> saved in phone book  
Ex) Call “John”  
FM1(FM One)  
FM2(FM Two)  
FMA  
Displays the FM1 screen.  
Displays the FM2 screen.  
Displays the FMA screen.  
Displays the AM screen.  
Displays the AMA screen.  
Provides guidance on Phone related com-  
mands. After saying this command, say “Call  
History”, “Phone book”, “Dial Number” to exe-  
cute corresponding functions.  
AM  
AMA  
FM Preset 1~6  
Plays the most recently played broadcast  
saved in FM Preset 1~6.  
Call History  
Phone book  
Displays the Call History screen.  
Displays the phone book screen. After saying  
this command, say the name of a phone book  
saved in the phone book to automatically con-  
nect the call.  
AM Preset 1~6  
FM 87.5~107.9  
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.  
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding  
frequency.  
Dial Number  
Display the Dial number screen. After saying  
this command, you can say the number what  
you want to call.  
AM 530~1710  
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding  
frequency.  
TA on  
Enable Traffic Announcement  
Disable Traffic Announcement  
Enable RDS News feature  
Disable RDS News feature  
Redial  
Radio  
Connects the most recently called number.  
TA off  
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next  
radio screen. (FM1➟ FM2➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟  
AMA)  
News on  
News off  
•
When listening to a different mode, displays  
the most recently played radio screen.  
4 261  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 262  
Features of your vehicle  
Command  
Media  
Function  
Command  
Function  
Moves to the most recently played media  
screen.  
AUX (Auxiliary)  
Plays the connected external device.  
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected  
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.  
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the  
corresponding track.  
Mute  
Mutes the radio or music volume.  
Repeats the most recent comment.  
Ends voice command.  
CD  
Plays the music saved in the CD.  
Pardon?  
Cancel (Exit)  
Search CD  
Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.  
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the  
track number to play the corresponding track.  
•
•
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After  
manually operate the device to select and  
play music.  
USB  
Plays USB music.  
Search USB  
Moves to USB file selection screen. After  
manually operate the device to select and play  
music.  
iPod  
Plays iPod music.  
Search iPod  
Moves to the iPod file selection screen. After,  
manually operate the device to select and play  
music.  
My Music  
Plays the music saved in My Music.  
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After  
manually operate the device to select and play  
music.  
4 262  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 263  
Features of your vehicle  
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be used while  
listening to FM, AM radio.  
• Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used while  
listening to Audio CD.  
Command  
Preset 1~6  
Auto Store  
Function  
Command  
Region off  
Function  
Disable Region feature  
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.  
Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-  
quencies with superior reception and saves in  
Presets 1~6.  
Program Type  
Moves to the RDS Program type selection  
screen. After, manually operate the device to  
select a desired program type.  
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to  
Preset 1~6.  
Random  
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.  
Random Off  
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-  
tial order.  
Seek up  
Plays the next receivable broadcast.  
Seek down  
Next Preset  
Plays the previous receivable broadcast.  
Repeat  
Repeats the current track.  
Selects the preset number next to the most  
recently selected preset. (Example:When cur-  
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.  
4 will be selected.)  
Repeat Off  
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-  
tial order.  
Next Track  
Previous Track  
Scan  
Plays the next track.  
Plays the previous track.  
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the  
most recently selected preset. (Example:  
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then  
preset no. 2 will be selected.)  
Scans the tracks from the next track for 10  
seconds each.  
Track 1~30  
Plays the desired track number.  
Search Track  
Moves to the track selection screen. After, say  
the track name to play the corresponding track.  
Scan  
Scans receivable frequencies from the current  
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.  
Information  
Displays the information screen of the current  
track.  
Preset Scan  
Moves to the next preset from the current  
present and plays for 10 seconds each.  
AF on  
AF off  
Region  
Enable Alternative Frequency feature  
Disable Alternative Frequency feature  
Enable Region feature  
4 263  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 264  
Features of your vehicle  
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be used  
while listening to music files saved in CD and USB.  
• iPod Commands: Commands that can be used while playing  
iPod.  
Command  
Function  
Command  
All Random  
Random  
Function  
Random  
Randomly plays the files within the current  
folder.  
Randomly plays all saved songs.  
Randomly plays the songs within the current  
category.  
All Random  
Random Off  
Randomly plays all saved files.  
Cancels random play to play files in sequential  
order.  
Random Off  
Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-  
tial order.  
Repeat  
Repeats the current file.  
Repeat  
Repeats the current song.  
Folder Repeat  
Repeat Off  
Repeats all files in the current folder.  
Repeat Off  
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-  
tial order.  
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential  
order.  
Next Song  
Plays the next song.  
Next File  
Previous File  
Scan  
Plays the next file.  
Previous Song  
Search Song  
Information  
Plays the previous song.  
Moves to the song selection screen.  
Plays the previous file.  
Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-  
onds each.  
Displays the information screen of the current  
song.  
Search File  
Search Folder  
Information  
Moves to the file selection screen.  
Moves to the folder selection screen.  
Displays the information screen of the current  
file.  
Copy  
Copies the current file into My Music.  
4 264  
JD eng 4c(~265).QXP 3/4/2015 4:49 PM Page 265  
Features of your vehicle  
®
• My Music Commands: Commands that can be used while  
playing My Music.  
• Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Commands:  
Commands that can be used while playing Phone Music.  
Command  
Random  
Function  
Command  
Play  
Pause  
Function  
Plays the currently paused song.  
Pauses the current song.  
Randomly plays all saved files.  
Random Off  
Cancels random play to play files in sequential  
order.  
Repeat  
Repeats the current file.  
Repeat Off  
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential  
order.  
Next File  
Previous File  
Scan  
Plays the next file.  
Plays the previous file.  
Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-  
onds each.  
Search File  
Information  
Moves to the file selection screen.  
Displays the information screen of the current  
file.  
Delete  
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an  
additional confirmation process.  
Delete All  
Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will  
bypass an additional confirmation process.  
4 265  

Related Topics

Keys Record your key number Key operations Immobilizer system Remote keyless entry Remote keyless entry system operations Transmitter precautions Battery replacement Smart key Smart key function Smart key precautions Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation Theft-alarm system Armed stage Theft-alarm stage Disarmed stage Door locks From outside From inside Deadlocks Door lock/unlock features Child-protector rear door lock Tailgate Opening the tailgate Closing the tailgate Emergency tailgate safety release Windows Power windows Manual windows Hood Opening the hood Closing the hood Fuel filler lid Opening the fuel filler lid Closing the fuel filler lid Panorama sunroof Sunshade Sliding the sunroof Tilting the sunroof Closing the sunroof Resetting the sunroof Steering wheel Electronic power steering Tilt and telescopic steering Heated steering wheel Horn Flex steering wheel Mirrors Inside rearview mirror Outside rearview mirror Instrument cluster Instrument panel illumination Gauges Manual transaxle shift indicator Automatic transaxle shift position indicator Double clutch transmission shift indicator Speed limiter indicator Odometer Trip computer LCD display information Warnings and indicators Rear parking assist system Operation Non-operational conditions Precautions Self-diagnosis Parking assist system Smart Parking Assist System(SPAS) Operating condition Non-operating condition How the system works Additional instructions(messages) System malfunction Rearview camera Hazard warning flasher Lighting Battery saver function Headlamp delay function Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function Static bending light Lighting control High-beam operation Turn signals and lane change signals Front fog light Rear fog light Daytime running light Headlight leveling device Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFLS) Wipers and washers Windshield wipers (front) Windshield washers (front) Interior lamp AUTO cut Map lamp Room lamp Vanity mirror lamp Luggage room lamp Glove box lamp Welcome system Headlamp welcome Interior light Puddle lamp Defroster Rear window defroster Heating and air conditioning Automatic heating and air conditioning Manual heating and air conditioning System operation Climate control air filter Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant Windshield defrosting and defogging Manual climate control system Automatic climate control system Clean air Storage compartment Center console storage Sliding armrest Glove box Cool box Sunglass holder Luggage tray Interior features Cigarette lighter Ashtray Cup holder Bottle holder Sunvisor Power outlet Aux, USB and iPod Clothes hanger Floor mat anchor(s) Luggage net (holder) Cargo area cover Barrier net Cargo security screen Luggage rail system Shopping bag holder Exterior features Mounting bracket for roof carrier Roof rack Audio system Antenna Audio remote control How car audio works

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
Audi
BMW
BMW
Citroen
Citroen
Ford
Ford
Honda
Honda
Peugeot
Peugeot